Paul M. Kurowski - Finite Element Analysis For Design Engineers-SAE International (2023)

You might also like

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 287

Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

Finite Element Analysis


for Design Engineers
Third Edition
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

Finite Element Analysis


for Design Engineers
Third Edition

PAUL M. KUROWSKI

Warrendale, Pennsylvania, USA


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

Disclaimer
Every effort has been made to provide an accurate text. The author and the manufacturers
shall not be held liable for any parts developed with this book or held responsible for any
inaccuracies or errors that appear in the book.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

400 Commonwealth Drive


Warrendale, PA 15096-0001 USA
E-mail: CustomerService@sae.org
Phone: 877-606-7323 (inside USA and Canada)
724-776-4970 (outside USA)
Fax: 724-776-0790

Copyright © 2023 SAE International. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form Publisher
or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior Sherry Dickinson Nigam
written permission of SAE International. For permission and licensing requests, contact SAE Permissions,
400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096-0001 USA; e-mail: copyright@sae.org; phone: Product Manager
724-772-4028 Amanda Zeidan

Library of Congress Catalog Number 2022949904 Director of Content


http://dx.doi.org/10.4271/9781468605365 Management
Kelli Zilko
Information contained in this work has been obtained by SAE International from sources believed to be
reliable. However, neither SAE International nor its authors guarantee the accuracy or completeness of Production and
any information published herein and neither SAE International nor its authors shall be responsible for Manufacturing Associate
any errors, omissions, or damages arising out of use of this information. This work is published with the Brandon Joy
understanding that SAE International and its authors are supplying information but are not attempting
to render engineering or other professional services. If such services are required, the assistance of an
appropriate professional should be sought.

ISBN-Print 978-1-4686-0535-8
ISBN-PDF 978-1-4686-0536-5
ISBN-epub 978-1-4686-0537-2

To purchase bulk quantities, please contact: SAE Customer Service

E-mail: CustomerService@sae.org
Phone: 877-606-7323 (inside USA and Canada)
724-776-4970 (outside USA)
Fax: 724-776-0790

Visit the SAE International Bookstore at books.sae.org


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

Contents

Preface xix

CHAPTER 1

Introduction 1
1.1. What Is Finite Element Analysis? 1
1.2. What Is the Place of FEA among Other Tools of
Computer-Aided Engineering? 2
1.3. Fields of Application of FEA and Mechanism Analysis 2
1.4. Fields of Application of FEA and CFD 4
1.5. What Is “FEA for Design Engineers”? 4
1.6. Note on Hands-On Exercises 5

CHAPTER 2

From CAD Model to Results of FEA 7


2.1. Formulation of the Mathematical Model 7
2.2. Selecting the Numerical Method to Solve the
Mathematical Model 10
2.2.1. Selected Numerical Methods in CAE 10
2.2.2. Reasons for the Dominance of FEM 10
2.3. FEA Model 11
2.3.1. Meshing 11
2.3.2. Formulation of FE Equations 12
2.3.3. Errors in FEA Results 13
2.4. Verification and Validation of FEA Results 14

© 2023 SAE International vii


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

viii Contents

CHAPTER 3

Fundamental Concepts of FEA 17


3.1. Formulation of a Finite Element 17
3.1.1. Closer Look at Finite Element 17
3.1.2. Requirements to be Satisfied by Displacement Interpolation
Function 20
3.1.3. Artificial Restraints 20
3.2. Choices of Discretization 22
3.3. Types of Finite Elements 23
3.3.1. Element Dimensionality 23
3.3.2. Element Shape 28
3.3.3. Element Order and Element Type 29
3.3.4. Summary of Commonly Used Elements 30
3.3.5. Element Modeling Capabilities 31

CHAPTER 4

Controlling Discretization Errors 33


4.1. Presenting Stress Results 34
4.2. Types of Convergence Analysis 36
4.2.1. h Convergence by Global Mesh Refinement 36
4.2.2. h Convergence by Local Mesh Refinement 40
4.2.3. Adaptive h Convergence 42
4.2.4. p Convergence Process 44
4.2.5. Choice of Convergence Process 46
4.3. Discretization Error 46
4.3.1. Convergence Error 47
4.3.2. Solution Error 47
4.4. Problems with Convergence 48
4.4.1. Stress Singularity 48
4.4.2. Displacement Singularity 54
4.5. Hands-On Exercises 58
4.5.1. HOLLOW PLATE 58
Description 58
Objective 58
Procedure  59
4.5.2. L BRACKET01 60
Description  60
Objective 60
Procedure  60
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

Contents ix

4.5.3. WEDGE 61
Description  61
Objective 61
Procedure 61

CHAPTER 5

Finite Element Mesh 65


5.1. Meshing Techniques 65
5.1.1. Manual Meshing 65
5.1.2. Semi-automatic Meshing 66
5.1.3. Automatic Meshing 67
5.2. Mesh Compatibility 69
5.2.1. Compatible Elements 70
5.2.2. Incompatible Elements 70
5.2.3. Forced Compatibility 71
5.3. Common Meshing Problems 73
5.3.1. Element Distortion 73
5.3.2. Mesh Adequacy 75
5.3.3. Element Mapping to Geometry 76
5.3.4. Incorrect Conversion to Shell Model 78
5.4. Hands-On Exercises 79
5.4.1. BRACKET01 79
Description  79
Objective  79
Procedure 79
5.4.2. CANTILEVER 80
Description 80
Objective  80
Procedure  80

CHAPTER 6

Modeling Process 83
6.1. Modeling Steps 84
6.1.1. Definition of the Objective of Analysis 84
6.1.2. Selection of the Units of Measurement 84
6.1.3. Geometry Preparation 85
6.1.4. Defining Material Properties 85
6.1.5. Defining Boundary Conditions 86
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

x Contents

6.2. Selected Modeling Techniques 87


6.2.1. Mirror Symmetry and Anti-symmetry Boundary Conditions 87
6.2.2. Axial Symmetry 92
6.2.3. Cyclic Symmetry 92
6.2.4. Realignment of Degrees of Freedom 94
6.2.5. Using Point Restraints to Eliminate Rigid Body Motions 95
6.3. Hands-On Exercises 96
6.3.1. BRACKET02—Mirror Symmetry BC 96
Description  96
Objective  96
Procedure  96
6.3.2. BRACKET02—Anti-symmetry BC 97
Description  97
Objective  97
Procedure  97
6.3.3. BRACKET02—Mirror Symmetry and Anti-symmetry BC 98
Description  98
Objective  98
Procedure  98
6.3.4. SHAFT01 99
Description  99
Objective  99
Procedure  99
6.3.5. PRESSURE TANK 100
Description  100
Objective  100
Procedure 100
6.3.6. RING 101
Description  101
Objective  101
Procedure  101
6.3.7. LINK01 102
Description  102
Objective  102
Procedure  103

CHAPTER 7

Nonlinear Geometry Analysis 105


7.1. Classification of Different Types of Nonlinearities 105
7.2. Geometric Nonlinearity 106
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

Contents xi

7.3. Membrane Stress Stiffening 112


7.4. Contact 117
7.5. Hands-On Exercises 122
7.5.1. CANTILEVER BEAM 122
Description  122
Objective  123
Procedure  123
7.5.2. SHAFT02 123
Description  123
Objective  123
Procedure  123
7.5.3. ROUND PLATE01 123
Description  123
Objective  124
Procedure  124
7.5.4. LINK02 124
Description  124
Objective  124
Procedure  124
7.5.5. SLIDING SUPPORT 125
Description  125
Objective  125
Procedure  125
7.5.6. CLAMP01 125
Description  125
Objective  125
Procedure  125
7.5.7. CLAMP02 126
Description  126
Objective  126
Procedure  126

CHAPTER 8

Nonlinear Material Analysis 129


8.1. Review of Nonlinear Material Models 129
8.2. Use of Nonlinear Material to Control Stress Singularity 132
8.3. Other Types of Nonlinearities 134
8.4. Hands-On Exercises 134
8.4.1. BRACKET NL 134
Objective  135
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

xii Contents

Procedure  135
8.4.2. L BRACKET02 135
Description  135
Objective 135
Procedure  135

CHAPTER 9

Modal Analysis 139


9.1. Differences between Modal and
Static Analysis 139
9.2. Interpretation of Displacement and Stress Results in
Modal Analysis 140
9.3. Modal Analysis with Rigid Body Motions 141
9.4. Importance of Supports in Modal Analysis 143
9.5. Applications of Modal Analysis 144
9.5.1. Finding Modal Frequencies and Associated Shapes of Vibration 144
9.5.2. Locating “Weak Spots” in Structure 145
9.5.3. Modal Analysis Provides Input to Vibration Analysis 146
9.6. Pre-stress Modal Analysis 146
9.7. Symmetry and Anti-symmetry Boundary Conditions in
Modal Analysis 148
9.8. Convergence of Modal Frequencies 149
9.9. Meshing Consideration for Modal Analysis 150
9.10. Hands-On Exercises 150
9.10.1. TUNING FORK 150
Description 150
Objective  150
Procedure  150
Comments  150
9.10.2. BOX 151
Description  151
Objective  151
Procedure  151
Comments  151
9.10.3. AIRPLANE 151
Description  151
Objective  151
Procedure  151
Comments  152
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

Contents xiii

9.10.4. BALL 152


Description  152
Objective  152
Procedure  152
Comments  152
9.10.5. LINK03 152
Description  152
Objective  152
Procedure  152
Comments  153
9.10.6. HELICOPTER BLADE 153
Description  153
Objective  153
Procedure  153
Comments  153
9.10.7. COLUMN 154
Description  154
Objective  154
Procedure  154
Comments  155
9.10.8. BRACKET03 155
Description  155
Objective  155
Procedure  155
Comments  156

CHAPTER 10

Buckling Analysis 159


10.1. Linear Buckling Analysis 160
10.2. Convergence of Results in Linear Buckling Analysis 163
10.3. Nonlinear Buckling Analysis 163
10.4. Controlling an Onset of Buckling in Nonlinear Buckling
Analysis 174
10.5. Summary 175
10.6. Hands-On Exercises 176
10.6.1. NOTCHED COLUMN - Free End 176
Description 176
Objective  176
Procedure  176
Comments  177
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

xiv Contents

10.6.2. NOTCHED COLUMN - Sliding End 177


Procedure  177
10.6.3. ROUND PLATE02 177
Description  177
Objective  177
Procedure  177
Comments  178
10.6.4. CURVED COLUMN 178
Objective  178
10.6.5. STAND 178
Description  178
Objective  178
Procedure  178
Comments  179
10.6.6. CURVED SHEET 179
Description  179
Objective  179
Procedure  179

CHAPTER 11

Vibration Analysis 181


11.1. Modal Superposition Method 181
11.2. Time Response Analysis 183
11.3. Frequency Response Analysis 186
11.4. Nonlinear Vibration Analysis 190
11.5. Hands-On Exercises 192
11.5.1. HAMMER - Impulse Load 192
Description 192
Objective  192
Procedure  192
Comments  193
11.5.2. HAMMER - Beating 193
Description  193
Objective  193
Procedure  193
Comments  194
11.5.3. ELBOW PIPE 194
Description  194
Objective  194
Procedure  194
Comments  194
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

Contents xv

11.5.4. CENTRIFUGE 194


Description  194
Objective  195
Procedure  195
Comments  195
11.5.5. PLANK 195
Description  195
Objective  195
Procedure  195
Comments  196

CHAPTER 12

Thermal Analysis 199


12.1. Heat Flow by Conduction 200
12.2. Heat Flow by Convection 201
12.3. Heat Transfer by Radiation 203
12.4. Modeling Considerations in Thermal Analysis 204
12.5. Challenges in Thermal Analysis 206
12.6. Hands-On Exercises 207
12.6.1. BRACKET04 207
Description 207
Objective  207
Procedure  207
Comments  207
12.6.2. HEAT SINK 207
Description  207
Objective  207
Procedure  207
Comments  208
12.6.3. CHANNEL 208
Description  208
Objective  208
Procedure  208
Comments  208
12.6.4. SPACE HEATER 209
Description  209
Objective  209
Procedure  209
Comments  209
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

xvi Contents

CHAPTER 13

Implementation of Finite Element Analysis in


the Design Process 211
13.1. Differences between CAD and FEA Geometry 211
13.1.1. Defeaturing 212
13.1.2. Idealization 213
13.1.3. Cleanup 214
13.2. Common Meshing Problems 216
13.3. Mesh Adequacy 218
13.4. Integration of CAD and FEA Programs 219
13.4.1. Stand-Alone FEA Programs 219
13.4.2. FEA Programs Integrated with CAD 219
13.4.3. Computer Aided Engineering (CAE) Programs 219
13.5. FEA Implementation 220
13.5.1. Positioning of CAD and FEA Activities 220
13.5.2. Personnel Training 221
13.5.3. FEA Program Selection 223
13.5.4. Hardware Selection 225
13.5.5. Building Confidence in FEA 225
13.5.6. Return on Investment 226
13.6. FEA Project 226
13.6.1. Before FEA Project Starts 227
13.6.2. Establish the Scope of Analysis 227
13.6.3. Create the Mathematical Model 227
13.6.4. Create the Finite Element Model and Solve It 228
13.6.5. Review the Results 228
13.6.6. Presentation of the Results 229
13.6.7. FEA Report 230
13.6.8. Project Documentation and Backups 231
13.6.9. Contracting Out FEA Services 231
13.6.10. Common Errors in Management of FEA Projects 232

CHAPTER 14

Summary 235
14.1. FEA Quiz 235
14.2. Frequently Asked Questions 238
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

Contents xvii

CHAPTER 15

FEA Resources 249

CHAPTER 16

Glossary 253

CHAPTER 17

List of Exercises 259


Index  261
About the Author 265
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

Preface

During the 60+ years of its development, Finite Element Analysis (FEA) evolved from an
exotic analysis method accessible only to specialized analysts into a mainstream engineering
tool. Progress in computer hardware and operating systems combined with progress in
Computer-Aided Design made FEA available to design engineers for use during product
design process.
Many books have been written about FEA. At one end of the spectrum, we find books
going deep into theory, and at the other end of the spectrum, software manuals explaining
how to use a certain program. There is little FEA literature taking a “middle ground”
approach and specifically addressing the needs of design engineers who use FEA as an
everyday design tool. This book attempts to fill this void by focusing on understanding FEA
fundamentals, which are explained by simple yet meaningful examples. “Finite Element
Analysis for Design Engineers” takes a practical approach, characteristic of the attitudes
of design engineers, and offers the readers an opportunity to try out all discussed topics by
solving downloadable exercises using their own FEA program.
Finite Element Analysis is a very broad field of knowledge. Repetitions in discussing
concepts, methods, and techniques cannot be avoided. Some topics are discussed more
than once, taking advantage of a growing body of knowledge as the reader progresses
through the book.

© 2023 SAE International xix


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

1
Introduction

1.1. W
 hat Is Finite Element Analysis?
Finite Element Analysis, commonly referred to as FEA, is a numerical method used for
analysis of structural and thermal problems encountered by mechanical engineers during
design is process. It is appropriate to start our discussion with definition of what design
analysis and how it relates to FEA. Design analysis is a process of investigating certain
properties of parts or assemblies. Design analysis can be conducted on a real object or on
models that represent certain aspects of the real object. If models are used instead of a real
object, the analysis can be conducted earlier in the design process before physical prototypes
are built. The models can be physical models (scale-down models, mock-ups, photoelastic
models, etc.) or mathematical models where a certain behavior of the design in progress is
captured and described by a mathematical apparatus. Simple mathematical models can
be solved analytically. More complex models require the use of numerical methods. FEA
is one of those numerical methods used to solve complex mathematical models. The FEA
has numerous uses in science and engineering, but the focus of this book is on structural
and thermal analysis. We will alternate between two terms and two acronyms that became
synonymous in the engineering practice: the Finite Element Analysis (FEA) and the Finite
Element Method (FEM).
The FEA is a powerful but demanding tool of engineering analysis. The expertise
expected of FEA users depends on the complexity of analysis but always requires familiarity
with Mechanics of Materials, Kinematics and Dynamics, Vibration, Heat Transfer,
Engineering Design, and other topics found in undergraduate mechanical engineering
curriculum. For this reason, many introductory FEA books offer the readers a quick review
of those engineering fundamentals. Rather than duplicating the efforts of other authors,
Chapter 15 refers readers to some of those books.

© 2023 SAE International 1


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

2 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

1.2. W
 hat Is the Place of FEA among
Other Tools of Computer-Aided
Engineering?
FEA is one of many tools of Computer-Aided Engineering (CAE) used in mechanical design
process. Other CAE tools include Fluid Flow Analysis commonly called Computational
Fluid Dynamics (CFD) and Mechanism Analysis. These three major CAE tools, FEA, CFD,
and Motion Analysis, are integrated with Computer-Aided Design (CAD), which is the hub
for all CAE applications. Geometry, material properties, and certain boundary conditions
can be exchanged between CAD and add-ins and among add-ins themselves (Figure 1.1).
FEA, CFD, and Mechanism Analysis have been developed independently and are based
on different numerical techniques; the integration shown in Figure 1.1 is a relatively new
development. However, even if CAE tools are stand-alone programs and not add-ins to
CAD, they can still be interfaced with CAD.

FIGURE 1.1 CAE applications such as FEA, CFD, and Motion Analysis are add-ins to CAD.
They can exchange data with CAD and among themselves.

FEA

Motion
Analysis CFD

© SAE International.
CAD

1.3. F
 ields of Application of FEA and
Mechanism Analysis
The main difference between FEA and Motion Analysis is the field of application. FEA is
used for analysis of deformable objects subjected to loads, and Motion Analysis is used for
analysis of motion of mechanisms.
A mechanism is not firmly supported and can move without deformation; components
of a mechanism can move as rigid bodies. On the contrary, any motion of a structure must
involve deformation of its components because a structure is, by definition, firmly supported.
The motion of a structure may take the form of a one-time deformation when a static load
is applied or oscillations about the position of equilibrium when a time-dependent load is
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 1 Introduction 3

present. In short, a mechanism may move without having to deform its components, while
any motion of a structure must be accompanied by deformation. If an object cannot move
without experiencing deformation, then it can be classified as a structure. Examples of a
mechanism and a structure are shown in Figure 1.2.
Depending on the objective of analysis, an object or its components may be treated
either as a mechanism or as a structure. A helicopter rotor is a mechanism; it spins relative
to the hull. A rotor may be treated as a rigid body, assembly of rigid bodies, or assembly of
elastic bodies. An individual blade may be treated as a rigid body or as a structure if its
vibration characteristics need to be analyzed (Figure 1.3).
A rigid body cannot deform under load; it is a mathematical abstract convenient in
mechanism analysis but not applicable to structural analysis.

FIGURE 1.2 An elliptic trammel is a mechanism designed to trace an ellipse when it


moves. The motion can be studied without considering deformation of its components. A
truss is attached firmly to the ground; it is a structure. It may experience one time
deformation under a static load or oscillations about the position of equilibrium under a
dynamic load. Any motion of the truss is accompanied by deformations.
© SAE International.

FIGURE 1.3 A helicopter rotor can be considered as a mechanism composed of rigid


bodies, a mechanism composed of elastic bodies or as a structure.
© SAE International.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

4 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

1.4. F
 ields of Application of FEA
and CFD
In this book we discuss the FEA as a tool of structural and thermal analysis of solid bodies.
Heat transfer analysis clearly differentiates FEA from CFD. Heat transfer in solid bodies is
analyzed with FEA while heat transfer in fluids requires CFD.

1.5. W
 hat Is “FEA for Design Engineers”?
What distinguishes “FEA for Design Engineers” from FEA performed by an analyst? To
set tone for the rest of this book, we will highlight the most essential characteristics of FEA
performed by design engineers.
•• FEA is one of many design tools: For design engineers FEA is one of many design
tools and is used along CAD, spreadsheets, catalogs, data bases, hand calculations,
textbooks, etc.
•• FEA is based on CAD models: A CAD model is the starting point for FEA.
•• FEA is concurrent with the design process: Since FEA is a design tool, it should
be used concurrently with the design process. It should keep up or, better, drive the
design process. Analysis iterations must be performed fast, and since results are used
to make design decisions, the results must be reliable even though not enough input
data may be available for analysis conducted early in the design process.
•• Limitations of “FEA for Design Engineers”: As we can see, the FEA used in the
design environment should meet quite high requirements. It must be executed
fast and accurately, even though it is in the hands of design engineers and not
FEA specialists. An obvious question is would it be better to have a dedicated
specialist perform FEA and let design engineers do what they do best: designing
new products? The answer depends on the size of organization, type of products,
company organization and culture, and many other tangible and non-tangible
factors. A consensus is that design engineers should handle relatively simple types
of analysis in support of design process. More complex types of analyses are usually
better handled by a dedicated analyst.
•• Objective of “FEA for Design Engineers”: The ultimate objective of using the FEA
as a design tool is to change the design process from iterative cycles of “design,
prototype, test” into a streamlined process where prototypes are used only for the
final design validation. With the use of FEA, design iterations are moved from the
physical space of prototyping and testing into the virtual space of computer-based
simulations (Figure 1.4). FEA is not the only tool of computer-aided simulation used
in the design process. There are others like CFD, Motion Analysis, etc. jointly called
the tools of Computer Aided Engineering (CAE).
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 1 Introduction 5

FIGURE 1.4 Traditional product development needs prototypes to support the design
process. A CAE-driven product development process uses numerical models, not physical
prototypes, to drive the development process.

TRADITIONAL CAE DRIVEN


PRODUCT DESIGN PROCESS PRODUCT DESIGN PROCESS

DESIGN CAD CAE

PROTOTYPING PROTOTYPING

TESTING TESTING
© SAE International.

PRODUCTION PRODUCTION

1.6. N
 ote on Hands-On Exercises
To assure an effective learning, it is necessary to complete hands-on exercises. Therefore,
topics discussed in this book are accompanied by simple, yet informative, examples
presented at the end of related chapters. The exercises are not specific to any software and
can be solved using any commercial FEA program. Completing exercises is essential in the
learning process. The list of exercises and downloading instructions are in Chapter 17.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

2
From CAD Model to
Results of FEA

2.1. F
 ormulation of the Mathematical
Model
To underscore the importance of a mathematical model in the analysis process, it is impor-
tant to describe what a mathematical model is, where it fits in the design analysis process,
and how different it is from the CAD model and the Finite Element (FE) model.
Suppose we need to find displacements and stresses in a pulley. The CAD model defines
a volume which is the solution domain (Figure 2.1). The volume has material properties
assigned to it and certain conditions are defined on external faces.
The conditions defined on the external faces of a model are called boundary conditions.
The boundary conditions can be defined in terms of displacements and loads. Displacement
boundary conditions are also called essential boundary conditions, and load boundary
conditions are also called natural boundary conditions.
In our example, the displacement boundary conditions are defined on the inner cylin-
drical face as zero displacement to represent the support provided by a bearing; the bearing
itself is not modeled. Load boundary conditions are applied to a section of the outer cylin-
drical face as pressure and represent the belt load. The above displacement and load
boundary conditions are defined explicitly. All remaining surfaces have implicit load
boundary conditions: zero stress in the direction normal to the outside faces. This reflects
the fact that normal stresses must not exist on an unloaded surface.

© 2023 SAE International 7


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

8 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 2.1 A CAD model of an idler pulley presented as a volume (solid geometry).
Representing the model as a volume, and not as surfaces, affords the inclusion of modeling
details such as small rounds.

© SAE International.
The geometry illustrated in Figure 2.1 is not the only possible representation of the
analyzed pulley. Figure 2.2 shows another possibility where a pulley geometry is represented
by surfaces. This approach does not allow to model rounds.
In many analysis problems, more than one geometry representation is possible. A
pulley geometry lends itself to being represented with either volumes or surfaces. Modeling
a beam offers more choices as the beam can be represented by volumes, surfaces, or curves
as shown in Figures 2.3, 2.4, and 2.5.
The I beam shown in Figures 2.3, 2.4, and 2.5 illustrate the progressive idealization of
a three-dimensional (3D) geometry: from volume (solid geometry) fully representing all
three dimensions to surface geometry missing one dimension (thickness) and to curve
geometry missing two dimensions.

FIGURE 2.2 The idler pulley geometry is represented by surfaces. The surface geometry
is missing one dimension: thickness, which cannot be derived from geometry and must
be defined as a number.

© SAE International.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 2 From CAD Model to Results of FEA 9

FIGURE 2.3 Beam represented by a volume (solid geometry). This affords the inclusion of
all details of geometry.
© SAE International.

FIGURE 2.4 Beam represented by surfaces cannot include details such as rounds.
Representing geometry by surfaces misses one dimension: thickness.
© SAE International.

FIGURE 2.5 Beam represented by a curve, shown here as a dotted line. In this idealized
model the beam cross-section properties are assigned to curves. The model contains no
details and can only represent the global beam behavior. Representing geometry by curves
misses two dimensions. Beam cross-section and the second moments of inertia cannot
be derived from geometry and must be defined as numbers.
© SAE International.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

10 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

Geometry alone does not fully define the mathematical model. Loads, restraints, and
material properties are also building blocks of the mathematical model and may be defined
in many ways to differentiate between different types of analyses such as static and dynamic
analyses, linear and nonlinear material, etc.
If the same problem can be described by more than one mathematical model, can
we say which model is the best? The best mathematical model is the one that adequately
represents the aspects of real design that are of interest to us, and does that at the lowest
cost. Consequently, a mathematical model must be constructed keeping in mind the objec-
tive of analysis. Creating a mathematical model that properly represents the data of interest
is the most important step in the modeling process. Yet its importance is often overlooked
in practice or worse, the distinctions among the CAD model, mathematical model, and FE
model are not recognized.

2.2. S
 electing the Numerical Method to
Solve the Mathematical Model
Completion of a mathematical model means we have formulated a boundary value problem
that can be solved with different numerical methods. We will briefly describe selected
numerical methods.

2.2.1. Selected Numerical Methods in CAE


•• Finite Volume Method: Finite Volume Method is based on the differential
formulation of a boundary value problem. The solution domain is divided into
cells (volumes). These methods are often used in fluid dynamics problems.
•• Boundary Element Method: Boundary Element Method is based on the integral
equation formulation of a boundary value problem. The Boundary Element Method
is efficient for compact 3D shapes, but difficult to implement for more “spread out”
geometries. Only the domain boundary, but not the inside, is divided into segments.
•• Finite Element Method: FEM is based on the variational formulation of a
boundary value problem. In the FEM the unknown functions are approximated
by functions generated from polynomials. These functions are effective for the
reasons of numerical efficiency. The entire solution domain (model geometry) must
be discretized (meshed) into simply shaped subdomains called elements.

2.2.2. Reasons for the Dominance of FEM


When numerical methods were first introduced in the engineering practice in the late 1960s,
many numerical methods were in use. Over time the FEM became the dominant numerical
method because of its generality and numerical efficiency. The generality and numerical
efficiency of FEM are a major consideration for programmers when they decide which method
to use in a commercial analysis program. The development of modern analysis software
consisting of several million lines of code is a huge investment, which can be recouped only
by creating a versatile and efficient product. The FEM delivers that versatility and efficiency
and, for this reason, has come to dominate the market of commercial analysis software.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 2 From CAD Model to Results of FEA 11

FIGURE 2.6 Different methods and approaches used for solving engineering
analysis problems.

DESIGN
ANALYSIS

REAL
MODELS
OBJECTS

PHYSICAL MATHEMATICAL
MODELS MODELS

ANALYTICAL NUMERICAL
SOLUTION SOLUTION

FINITE VOLUME METHOD BOUNDARY ELEMENT FINITE ELEMENT METHOD


METHOD
© SAE International.

Different methods and approaches used for solving engineering design analysis
problems are schematically presented in Figure 2.6.

2.3. FEA Model


2.3.1. Meshing
Having decided to use the FEA to solve the mathematical model, we must split the solution
domain into simply shaped subdomains called finite elements. The discretization process
is commonly called meshing, and elements are called “finite” because of their finite, rather
than infinitesimally small, size.
Why is meshing required? Risking some oversimplification, we may picture the FEM
as a method of representing variables like displacements by polynomial functions that
produce a displacement field compatible with the boundary conditions and, at the same
time, minimize the total potential energy of the model. To describe the entire model “in
one piece,” without splitting it into elements, the polynomial functions would have to be very
complex. This is where the need for meshing becomes obvious. Meshing splits up the solution
domain as in Figure 2.7 into simply shaped elements or subdomains shown in Figure 2.8,
allowing for simple polynomials to be used to approximate displacement (or temperature
in a thermal problem) in each element.
As we will discuss later, the behavior of each element is fully characterized by displace-
ments of its nodes. Therefore, the continuous mathematical model with an infinite number
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

12 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 2.7 A mathematical model of a bracket is defined here by a two-dimensional


(2D) domain (geometry), by the boundary conditions (loads and restraints), and by the
material properties. A uniformly distributed load (natural boundary conditions) is applied
over the length of the red line. Fixed restraints (essential boundary conditions) are applied
over the length of the blue line.

© SAE International.
FIGURE 2.8 FE model of the support bracket; the 2D solution domain and boundary
conditions have been discretized. Red dots indicate nodes where the equivalent nodal load is
applied; blue dots indicate nodes where restraints are applied. Originally, continuous loads
and restraints are now represented by loads and restraints applied to element nodes.

© SAE International.
of degrees of freedom (DOFs) is approximated after discretization by a discrete FE model
with a finite number of DOFs.

2.3.2. Formulation of FE Equations


Out of an infinite number of possible nodal displacements allowed by the restraints, only
one set of the nodal displacements minimizes the total potential energy of the model. The
state of the minimum total potential energy corresponds to the state of equilibrium.
Therefore, by finding the set of nodal displacements that minimizes the total potential
energy of the model, we also find the state of equilibrium of the model under the applied
loads and restraints. The application of the principle of the minimum total potential energy
leads to the formulation of the fundamental FEA equations:

 K   d    F  (2.1)
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 2 From CAD Model to Results of FEA 13

where
[K] is the known stiffness matrix
[F] is the known vector of nodal loads
[d] is the unknown vector of nodal displacements

The stiffness matrix [K] is defined by the model geometry, material properties, and
displacement boundary conditions. Loads are expressed by the load vector [F]. The
unknowns are the nodal displacements [d], and nodal displacements (or temperatures in
thermal problems) are the primary unknowns in the FEM. Strains and stresses are secondary
unknowns, they are calculated once the nodal displacements have been found.
FEM equations (2.1) take the form of linear algebraic equations and can be solved with
various numerical techniques.

2.3.3. Errors in FEA Results


FEA results are produced in a process that consists of several steps and each step introduces
its errors (Figure 2.9).

FIGURE 2.9 Steps in an FEA project: (1) Converting CAD geometry to FEA geometry, (2)
Definition of the mathematical model, (3) Meshing, (4) Solution.

Loads Restraints

MATHEMATICAL
MODEL

FEA FEA
geometry Material Type of model
properties analysis
© SAE International.

CAD
Results
geometry

•• Step 1—Converting CAD geometry to FEA geometry: Starting with a CAD


model that represents the design, we need to simplify the geometry before meshing.
Manufacturing specific CAD geometry almost always requires simplifications
that may take the form of idealization (e.g., using surfaces or curves in place of
a solid geometry) or defeaturing (suppressing or deleting geometry details that
we deem unnecessary for analysis), assuming that there are no CAD modeling
errors. For example, Figure 2.9 shows that rounds have been removed from outside
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

14 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

edges. Simplified geometry, called FEA geometry, is the first building block of a
mathematical model.
•• Step 2—Creating a mathematical model: Load and restraints, material properties
and the type of analysis are defined. This way a mathematical model is now ready.
Steps 1 and 2 introduce the modeling errors.
•• Step 3—Discretization: The mathematical model is discretized into finite elements.
The discretization is done on geometry, mass, and boundary conditions. There is
nothing continuous left in the FEA model. FE equations (2.1) are created in this
step. Step 3 introduces the discretization errors.
•• Step 4—Solution: FE equations are solved, and results are produced. This introduces
a solution error, also called numerical error. Results are now used to make a design
decision. If results are misunderstood, then the error of interpretation of results is
introduced after solution is completed.

Modeling errors, discretization errors, and solution errors are unavoidable; the error
of interpretation of results is fully preventable. While all errors affect results, only discreti-
zation errors are specific to the FEA. Therefore, only discretization errors can be controlled
using FEA techniques.

2.4. V
 erification and Validation of FEA
Results
Verification and validation as they apply to design analysis with FEA are defined as follows:
•• Verification checks if the mathematical model has been correctly discretized and
solved.
•• Validation determines if the solution correctly represents the reality from the
perspective of the intended use of the results. It checks if the results correctly describe
the real-life behavior of the analyzed system.

Verification and validation in the FEA process are pictured in Figure 2.10.
A model with meshing errors would not pass a verification test. For example, using
too large elements, the solution would not be correct. Verification fails if discretization and/
or solution errors invalidate results. Convergence analysis will reveal problems causing
verification failure. A model with incorrect load definitions would pass the verification test
because verification only concerns itself with the correctness of the solution of the math-
ematical model, not if the mathematical model itself is correct.
Establishing the correctness of a mathematical model along with the correctness of its
solution is the process of validation. Validation will fail if conceptual errors are made in
the definition of the mathematical model. The conceptual errors are much more dangerous
than the errors of discretization. They may escape the modeler’s attention, especially because
there is no well-defined process to reveal conceptual errors. The only protection from
validation failure is the correct definition of the analyzed problem.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 2 From CAD Model to Results of FEA 15

FIGURE 2.10 Verification and validation of FEA results. Verification checks the numerical
solution of a mathematical model. Validation checks how well the results apply to reality. The
flowchart also shows errors introduced at each step of the FEA project.

REALITY

Modeling error

MATHEMATICAL MODEL

Discretization error
Validation

FINITE ELEMENT MODEL


Verification

Solution error
© SAE International.

RESULTS
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

3
Fundamental
Concepts of FEA

3.1. F
 ormulation of a Finite Element
3.1.1. Closer Look at Finite Element
Later in this chapter we find displacements in a thin flat plate that can be simplified to a
2D problem using triangular plane stress elements. The displacement field inside each
element and along the edges is described by certain polynomial functions called displace-
ment interpolation functions. The order of the displacement interpolation function used
in the element defines the order of the element. If the element uses the first order (linear)
displacement interpolation functions, it is called the first order element. If the element uses
the second order displacement interpolation function, it is called the second order
element, etc.
Arguments of displacement interpolation functions are nodal displacements. Once
nodal displacements are found, displacements anywhere in the element can be calculated
using the nodal displacements. Under a load the element deforms and assumes a new shape,
and nodes move from their original locations to the new ones. In the case of a 2D plane
stress element, we need to know the x and y displacement components of all nodes to
describe element transformation from the old to the new shape. This is because, in a 2D
element, nodal displacements are fully defined by only two in-plane displacement compo-
nents. The ability to perform a given displacement is called a Degree of Freedom (DOF).

© 2023 SAE International 17


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

18 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 3.1 A three nodded, first order 2D element has two degrees of freedom per
node: x and y translations. The total number of degrees of freedom is 6 meaning that 6
independent variables fully describe the element transformation from the undeformed to the
deformed shape. A 6 nodded second order 2D element also has two degrees of freedom per
node, but the total number of degrees of freedom for the element is 12. Upon deformation,
the edges of the second order element may assume a curved shape. Edges of the second
order element may be curved even before deformation if the element is mapped to a
curvilinear geometry. Rotational DOFs are not required to describe the deformation of
these elements.

First order

© SAE International.
Second order

The first order three nod element in Figure 3.1 (top) has 2 DOFs per node; therefore, the total
number of DOFs in the element is 6. Edges of the first order elements are straight before
and after the deformation. In the second order elements, the second order polynomials are
used for the displacement interpolation functions, and element edges do not have to remain
straight; they may “bend” assuming a curvilinear shape. To describe this, we need to add
mid-side nodes as shown in Figure 3.1 (bottom). Mid-side nodes differentiate the first order
element from the second order element. This applies to 2D as well as to 3D elements as
shown in Figures 3.1 and 3.2.
Strains are calculated by differentiating displacements. Therefore, if displacements are
described by the first order polynomial functions (linear functions), then strains and stresses
are constant within the element. If displacements are described by the second order poly-
nomial functions, then strains and stresses are distributed linearly within the element
(Figure 3.3).
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 3 Fundamental Concepts of FEA 19

FIGURE 3.2 A four-noded, first order 3D solid tetrahedral element (top) has three
degrees of freedom per node: x, y, z translations. In this element linear shape functions model
linear displacements along edges, faces, and in the volume of the element. The element has a
total of 12 DOFs. A 10-noded second order 3D solid tetrahedral element (bottom) models
second order displacements and requires mid-side nodes. The element has a total of 30
DOFs. Edges and faces of the second order element may be curved even before deformation
if the element is mapped to a curvilinear geometry. Rotational DOFs are not required to
describe element deformation.

First order

Second order
© SAE International.

FIGURE 3.3 The first order element models linear displacements and constant stress; the
second order element models the second order displacements and linear stress. This is shown
in the graphs where the ordinate schematically denotes a location in the element. Solid
tetrahedral elements are shown but the same applies to other elements.

d 

First order

x x

d 
© SAE International.

Second order

x x
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

20 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

3.1.2. R
 equirements to be Satisfied by Displacement
Interpolation Function
The reason why polynomials are used as displacement interpolation functions is their
versatility. Programmers have considerable freedom in selecting the form of polynomials
to build interpolation functions. For example, incomplete polynomials or different order
polynomials along different edges and faces may be used. However, certain requirements
must be always met to assure that the displacement field inside the element as well as in the
entire mesh is continuous.
•• Internal compatibility: Displacement interpolation functions must be continuous
over the entire element.
•• Inter-element compatibility: Displacement along the common edge and common
face between two elements must be described by the same function to make sure that
displacements are continuous across the element boundaries and that no “cracks”
or “overlaps” form between elements.
•• Rigid body motion (RBM): If the element is displaced as a rigid body (without
deformation), the element must show zero strain. This is called a patch test.
•• Constant strain: The element must be able to model the constant strain cases.

3.1.3. Artificial Restraints


We use an example of a thin flat plate under a tensile load to illustrate the effect of the
element order on displacement and stress results (Figure 3.4).
We use von Mises stress to present stress results because the plate material is ductile,
and von Mises stress gives a correct assessment of material safety. For meshing we use first
order triangular elements capable of modeling linear displacements. The mesh of the first
order elements is shown in Figure 3.5. Elements are too large to produce accurate results;
but we use large elements to make it easy to see the effects that displacement interpolation
functions have on the results.

FIGURE 3.4 A thin, flat hollow plate is restrained along the left vertical edge and loaded
with a tensile load in the horizontal direction applied to the right vertical edge. This is a 2D
plane stress problem.
© SAE International.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 3 Fundamental Concepts of FEA 21

FIGURE 3.5 Model meshed with the first order triangular elements. The round hole is
represented only approximately because the circle is replaced by straight
element edges.
© SAE International.

FIGURE 3.6 Resultant displacement results in the plate. The linear displacement field in
each element is evidenced by straight lines demarcating colors. The maximum displacement
is 0.112 mm.

0.112

0.102

0.093

0.084

0.074

0.065

0.056

0.046

0.037

0.028
© SAE International.

0.019

0.009

0.000

Having obtained the solution, we observe linearly distributed displacements (Figure


3.6) and constant stresses in the first order elements (Figure 3.7).
The stress result shown in Figure 3.7 may come as a surprise. We never see “rough”
results in FEA reports, but this is because smaller elements are usually used, and results
are presented using the stress-averaging technique. The stress averaging technique masks
the fact that, in the first order element, stresses are constant in each element and that stresses
are discontinuous across element boundaries.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

22 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 3.7 Von Mises stress results in the plate; results show constant stress in each
element. The maximum von Mises stress is 216 MPa.

216.0

201.5

187.1

172.6

158.2

143.7

129.3

114.8

100.4

85.9

© SAE International.
71.5

57.0

42.6

Displacement interpolation functions impose artificial restraints on the FE model


because the model must comply not only with the applied boundary conditions as the
mathematical model does but also with the displacement patterns imposed by the element
definition as seen in Figure 3.6. As a result, the discretized FE model is stiffer than the
corresponding mathematical model.
First order elements are used in this introductory example but are rarely used in FEA
practice. The commonly used elements are second order elements.

3.2. C
 hoices of Discretization
Theoretically, there is an infinite number of ways in which a mathematical model can
be turned into an FE model by meshing. The chosen mesh is a realization of a certain choice
of discretization. Three major factors define the choice of discretization:
•• Element size: The element size is defined by its characteristic dimension. What
matters is the relative size of the element in relation to the size of the discretized
features. For a 2D triangular element, the element size may be defined as the diameter
of the circle circumscribed on the element. Element size is commonly denoted as
h (Figure 3.8).
•• Element order: Element order is defined by the order of the displacement
interpolation functions describing the displacement field inside the element, along
element edges, and element faces.
•• Element mapping: When an element is mapped to assume the shape in the FE
mesh, the element shape distorts (Figure 3.9). Excessive distortion causes elements
degeneration.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 3 Fundamental Concepts of FEA 23

FIGURE 3.8 The size of a 2D triangular element is here the diameter of the circumscribed
circle. The size of a 3D tetrahedral element is here the diameter of the circumscribed sphere.

h h
© SAE International.

FIGURE 3.9 Mapping transforms the original element shape (left) into an element in the
mesh (right) is illustrated with a 2D triangular element and 3D tetrahedral element.

Triangular element before and after mapping


© SAE International.

Tetrahedral element before and after mapping

3.3. T
 ypes of Finite Elements
Commercial FEA programs use many different types of elements. There are many ways to
organize finite elements; we will present only commonly used element groups.

3.3.1. E
 lement Dimensionality
Classification according to how the element represents three dimensions distinguishes
among 3D elements (solid, shell, membrane, beam), 2D elements (plane stress, plane strain,
axisymmetric), and one-dimensional (1D) elements.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

24 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

•• 3D Solid element: Solid element fully represents all three dimensions. The
displacement field in a solid element is 3D and each displacement component is
approximated by polynomials of the same degree. Nodes of solid elements have
three degrees of freedom which are translations. Three translations are needed
to define the element transformation from an undeformed to a deformed shape.
Therefore, nodes of commonly used solid elements have 3 DOFs (Figure 3.10).
•• 3D Shell element: Shell element has one dimension collapsed. That collapsed
dimension is the thickness of the shell which is considered small relative to
the other dimensions. Assumptions must be made about stress distribution
along that missing dimension. Stresses normal to the shell cross-section (also
called in-plane stresses) are assumed to have linear distribution across the
thickness; therefore, the shell element can model bending. Transverse shear
stress is constant in thin shell element formulation and parabolic in thick shell
element formulation (Figure 3.11).

FIGURE 3.10 Mesh of 3D solid tetrahedral elements.

© SAE International.
FIGURE 3.11 The arc represented by a surface (left) may be meshed either with shell or
with membrane elements; shell element and membrane element have the same appearance.
Flat shell elements (right) look the same as 2D plate elements.
© SAE International.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 3 Fundamental Concepts of FEA 25

The elements shown in these illustrations would be too large for analysis.
•• 3D Membrane Element: The membrane element looks the same as a shell element
but stresses normal to the membrane cross-section (also called in-plane stresses)
are constant and transverse shear stresses are not modeled. The membrane element
cannot model bending. Shell and membrane elements have 6 DOFs per node: three
translations and three rotations. The difference in how stresses normal to a cross-
section is modeled in shell and membrane elements is shown in Figure 3.12.
•• 3D Beam Element: The beam element has two dimensions collapsed. It is assumed
that the width and height of the cross-section are small in comparison to the length.
Linear variations of stress in two directions perpendicular to the normal cross-section
to the beam are modeled. The beam element can be seen as a curve with cross-section
properties: the area and the second moments of inertia. Beam elements have 6 DOFs
per node: three translations and three rotations, the same as shell elements. Figure 3.13
shows how beam elements may be depicted in different FEA programs.
•• 2D Elements: 2D elements are used when a structure response to load can be fully
described in two dimensions. 2D elements fall into three categories: plane stress,
plane strain, and axisymmetric elements. Plane stress elements are used for the
analysis of thin planar structures loaded in-plane, where out-of-plane stress is
assumed to be equal to zero. Plane strain elements are used for the analysis of
thick prismatic structures loaded in-plane, where out-of-plane strain is assumed
to be equal to zero. Axisymmetric elements are intended for the analysis of
axisymmetric structures under axisymmetric loads and restraints. In all these
cases, the structure displacements can be fully described using elements with 2 per
node. For the plane stress and plane strain elements these are two components of in-
plane translation. For axisymmetric elements, these are radial and axial translations.

FIGURE 3.12 A shell element models the linear distribution of in-plane stresses. The in-plane stresses may
be separated into the bending stress component (the same magnitude but in the opposite direction on the top and the
bottom) and the membrane stress component where stress is constant across the element thickness. A membrane
element (bottom) can only model the constant distribution of in-plane stress across the thickness. A shell element has
bending stiffness and membrane stiffness while a membrane element has only membrane stiffness. The illustration shows
element thickness even though the thickness is not represented as a physical dimension.

Thickness

Shell element

Linear distribution of in-plane Bending stresses Membrane stresses


stresses across thickness

Thickness

Membrane element
© SAE International.

Constant distribution of in-plane


stresses across thickness
Membrane stresses only
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

26 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

A 2D plane stress model is shown in Figure 3.14, a 2D plane strain model is shown in
Figure 3.15, and a 2D axisymmetric model is shown in Figure 3.16. All these figures
show large elements for the clarity of illustrations.
•• 1D Elements: 1D elements have no practical applications but because of their
simplicity are used extensively in introductory FEA courses. A 1D element has 1
DOF per node. 1D elements are called spring or bar elements An example of a 1D
element mesh is shown in Figure 3.17.

FIGURE 3.13 An appearance of a beam element may differ depending on the FEA
program and the settings used. The cross-section (here, an I beam) may be fully rendered, it
may be depicted only schematically (here, as a circle) or not shown at all.

© SAE International.
Fully rendered cross-section Schematic cross-section No cross-section

FIGURE 3.14 2D plane stress elements.

© SAE International.

Thin 3D model Representative cross-section meshed


with 2D plane stress elements
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 3 Fundamental Concepts of FEA 27

FIGURE 3.15 2D plane strain elements.


© SAE International.

Thick 3D model Representative cross-section meshed


with 2D plane strain elements

FIGURE 3.16 2D axisymmetric elements. The axisymmetric vase is shown in a cross-


section view to show the radial slice meshed with 2D axisymmetric elements.
© SAE International.

Radial slice meshed with 2D axi-symmetric elements


Axi-symmetric model is shown in section view

Figures 3.14, 3.15, and 3.16 show large elements for clarity of illustrations. These elements
would be too large for analysis.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

28 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 3.17 Mesh of three 1D elements shown as springs; nodes 2 and 3 are “spread out”
vertically for clarity of this illustration. Nodes 1 and 3 are fixed and node 2 can move in the
direction of the applied force.

2 3

1 2

© SAE International.
2 3

3.3.2. Element Shape


Theoretically, an element of any shape can be designed, but for practical reasons, only simple
shapes are used because only simple shapes can mesh an arbitrary geometry. Therefore, 2D
elements come as triangles and quadrilaterals and 3D elements come as tetrahedral (tetras),
prisms, and hexahedral (brick) elements. Tetrahedral, hexahedral (brick), and triangular
prism elements are illustrated in Figure 3.18.
Meshers work most reliably with tetrahedral elements for volume meshing and with
triangular elements for surface meshing, and for this reason, tetrahedral and triangular
elements are the most often used element shapes.

FIGURE 3.18 Both h elements and p elements have shapes limited to simple primitives:
tetrahedron, hexahedron, triangular prism wedge. p elements are allowed a much higher
distortion from the ideal shape when mapped to model geometry.
© SAE International.

h elements p elements
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 3 Fundamental Concepts of FEA 29

3.3.3. Element Order and Element Type


Element order and element type are closely related characteristics. Element order is
defined by the order of the displacement interpolation functions used by the element.
The first order element uses the first order displacement interpolation functions, the
second order element uses second order displacement interpolation functions, etc.
Element type denotes if the element order is fixed or if the order can be changed during
solution without remeshing. Elements for which the order is fixed are used are called h
elements. Elements for which the order can be changed during solution are called p
elements. h elements are usually set by default to order. p elements can be automatically
upgraded to higher orders anywhere between the fifth and twelfth order depending on
the FEA program. h and p elements can be usually told apart by appearance as shown
in Figures 3.19 and 3.20.
The h-method uses elements with low shape distortion usually modeling the second
order displacement field. These two factors combined (elements must not be too distorted
and displacement field in the element is of low order) require large numbers of small elements
to model displacements and stresses. The user must determine if the mesh is adequate to
deliver the sought results. p-method uses high order elements of more complex shapes.
Differences between h and p elements are summarized in Table 3.1.

FIGURE 3.19 The same solid model meshed with solid tetrahedral h elements and solid
tetrahedral p elements. Element shrinkage has been applied to the p element mesh.
© SAE International.

h element mesh p element mesh


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

30 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 3.20 The same surface model meshed with triangular shell h elements and
triangular shell p elements.

© SAE International.
h element mesh p element mesh

TABLE 3.1 Differences between h elements and p elements.

h elements p elements
Element shape Tetrahedron, prism, hexahedron Tetrahedron, prism, hexahedron
Mapping Low deviation from the original Higher deviation from the
shape is allowed original shape is allowed, but this
may introduce errors on highly
curved edges and surfaces
Displacement/temperature field Described by lower-order Described by higher-order
polynomials; usually second polynomials
order
Convergence process Element order does not change Element size does not change
during the convergence process during the convergence process

3.3.4. Summary of Commonly Used Elements


Most commercial FEA programs use h elements. A summary of commonly used h elements
is given in Figure 3.21. Beam elements do not have a selectable order. Transverse ­displacements
along the length of a beam element are set to the third order.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 3 Fundamental Concepts of FEA 31

FIGURE 3.21 Commonly used h elements are categorized according to the dimensionality
of the discretized geometry and the element order. A beam element is shown as an I beam,
but a beam element cross-section may be of any shape.

3D elements 2D elements
Element order Plane stress
Solid Shell Beam Plane strain
Axisymmetric

First order
© SAE International.

Second order

3.3.5. Element Modeling Capabilities


Elements can be also categorized based on their capabilities to support certain types of
analysis. Different categories differentiate between small and large strain elements, thin
and thick shell elements, etc. There are also elements developed for specific purposes such
as a point mass, spring, rigid connector, gap elements, and many more. The graphic repre-
sentation of those special elements depends on the FEA program. Figure 3.22 shows four
springs, a mass, and several links used to model an oscillator in SOLIDWORKS Simulation.

FIGURE 3.22 Four spring elements connect the blue base to the red cube. The point mass
element is located above the top face of the cube; it is attached to the top face with rigid
link elements. The blue base and the red cube are meshed with solid tetrahedral elements.

Mass element

Links element

Springs
© SAE International.

element
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

4
Controlling
Discretization Errors

M
odeling errors, discretization errors, solution errors, and errors of interpretation
results (Figure 2.10) all affect FEM results. However, only discretization errors are
specific to the FEM, and only the discretization errors can be controlled using
FEM tools. For this reason, we discuss them first, discussion of other errors will follow in
later chapters.
The objective of control of the discretization error is to find how the data of interest
(displacement, stress, temperature, etc.) are dependent on the choice of discretization (mesh).
The objective is not to minimize the discretization error but to obtain a solution where the
data of interest do not significantly depend on the choice of discretization. An analysis is
not complete unless we have a reliable estimate of the discretization error. The analysis of
a discretization error is done in a convergence process. An example of different choices of
discretization is shown in Figure 4.1 where the same model is meshed with four meshes,
each one with a different element size.

© 2023 SAE International 33


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

34 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 4.1 The same model meshed with triangular shell elements of different sizes.
This illustrates the global mesh refinement.

Mesh 1
Element size 20 mm

Mesh 2
Element size 10 mm

Mesh 3
Element size 5 mm

© SAE International.
Mesh 4
Element size 2.5 mm

4.1. P
 resenting Stress Results
Before discussing the convergence process, we need to look at different ways of presenting
stress results. As we already know, nodal displacements are computed first, and then strains
and stresses are calculated based on the displacement results. Stresses are first calculated
inside the element at certain locations, called Gauss points. Gauss points are locations used
in the numerical generation of the element stiffness matrix. The location of Gauss points
in a triangular second order element is schematically shown in Figure 4.2 . Next, stress
results are extrapolated to nodes. Stress results from all the elements sharing the given node
are averaged, and one value, called nodal stress, is reported for each node. A stress plot is
prepared using nodal stresses. The nodal stress is also called the averaged stress.
An alternative procedure to prepare a stress plot still uses stresses at Gauss points but
averages them among themselves within the element. This method calculates one stress
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 4 Controlling Discretization Errors 35

FIGURE 4.2 Location of Gauss points (black dots) in the second order triangular element.
© SAE International.

value for the entire element. The stress value is called the element stress or the non-averaged
stress because stresses are not averaged between neighboring elements.
Nodal stresses are used more often because they produce continuous stress plots.
However, an examination of element stresses provides important feedback on the quality
of the results. If element stresses in two adjacent elements differ too much, it indicates that
the element size at this location is too large to properly model the stresses.
Nodal and element stresses in Mesh 1 in Figure 4.1 are shown in Figure 4.3. The model is
restrained along the left vertical edge and subjected to a uniform tension applied to the
right vertical edge. A mesh with large elements is used for clarity in this illustration.
Nodal stresses are higher than element stresses because of the extrapolation of the nodal
stresses to the surface.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

36 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 4.3 A mesh of the second order triangular elements represents a hollow plate in
tension. The nodal stress plot shows continuous stress distribution. The element stress plot
shows piecewise constant stresses.

308.8
283.9
259.0
234.1
209.2
184.4
159.5
134.6
109.7
84.8 Nodal stresses
59.9

216.5
200.5
184.5
168.4
152.4
136.4

© SAE International.
120.3
104.3
88.3
Element stresses
72.3
56.2

4.2. T
 ypes of Convergence Analysis
Discretization errors are found in the process of making systematic changes to the choice
of discretization. The process is called convergence process; there are several variations of
the convergence process.

4.2.1. h Convergence by Global Mesh Refinement


One way to make systematic changes to the choice of discretization is to modify the element
size through mesh refinement. Since h denotes characteristic element size, as shown in
Figure 3.8, the convergence process through mesh refinement is called h convergence. In
this process the size of elements is gradually reduced. We will illustrate it with the example
of the hollow plate. The plate is supported along the left vertical edge and loaded with a
tensile load uniformly distributed along the right vertical edge. Figure 4.1 shows the model
meshed with four different meshes. The element size is halved with every mesh refinement,
meaning that each triangular element is replaced with four smaller triangular elements.
Step 1 in the h convergence process uses the element size of 20 mm. Step 4 uses the element
size of 2.5 mm. Displacement results are summarized in Figure 4.4 and von Mises stress results
are summarized in Figure 4.5. Shell elements are used to produce the results. A 2D plane stress
element could have been used as well because the model is flat, loaded in-plane, and thin.
Having performed four iterations in the h convergence process, we can summarize the
results in Table 4.1.
The number of DOFs in the model is not equal to the number of nodes times the number
of DOFs per node (here six DOFs per node) because some DOFs are eliminated by the
restraints and therefore, not counted. The data of interest (here the maximum displacement
and the maximum von Mises stress) may be plotted against the number of DOFs or some
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 4 Controlling Discretization Errors 37

FIGURE 4.4 Displacement results produced by four different meshes representing the
same problem; this illustrates h convergence process by global mesh refinement.

0.11723
0.10551
0.09378
0.08206
0.07034
0.05861
0.04689 Mesh 1
0.03517
Element size 20 mm
0.02345
Max. displ. 0.11723 mm
0.01172
0.00000

0.11792
0.10613
0.09434
0.08255
0.07075
0.05896
0.04717 Mesh 2
0.03538 Element size 10 mm
0.02358 Max. displ. 0.11792 mm
0.01179
0.00000

0.11821
0.10639
0.09457
0.08275
0.07093
0.05911
0.04728 Mesh 3
0.03546 Element size 5 mm
0.02364 Max. displ. 0.11821 mm
0.01182
0.00000

0.11824
0.10642
0.09460
0.08277
0.07095
0.05912
Mesh 4
© SAE International.

0.04730
0.03547 Element size 5 mm
0.02365 Max. displ. 0.11824 mm
0.01182
0.00000

other related measure. The graph in Figure 4.6 shows the maximum displacement in the
direction of load as a function of the inverse of the element size. The graph in Figure 4.7
shows the maximum von Mises stress as a function of the inverse of the element size.
In a discretized model, displacements must follow a displacement pattern modeled by
the elements used for meshing. This adds some (very low) stiffness, which we call artificial
stiffness. Every mesh refinement reduces the artificial stiffness. This explains why displace-
ment increases with every iteration as shown in Figure 4.6. Strain is a derivative of displace-
ment, and stress is calculated once strain has been found; therefore, stress also increases
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

38 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 4.5 Von Mises stress results produced by four different meshes representing the same problem; this
illustrates h convergence process by global mesh refinement.

308.8
283.9
259.0
234.1
209.2
184.4
159.5 Mesh 1
134.6
109.7
Element size 20 mm
84.8 Max. von Mises stress 308.8 MPa
59.9

297.1
270.4
243.7
217.0
190.3
163.6
136.9 Mesh 2
110.2 Element size 10 mm
83.5 Max. von Mises stress 297.1 MPa
56.8
30.1

337.9
306.9
275.9
245.0
214.0
183.0
152.1 Mesh 3
121.1 Element size 5 mm
90.1 Max. von Mises stress 337.9 MPa
59.2
28.2

364.3
329.6
294.9
260.2
225.5
190.8

© SAE International.
156.2
Mesh 4
121.5
86.8 Element size 5 mm
52.1 Max. von Mises stress 364.3 MPa
17.4

TABLE 4.1 Results of four steps of h convergence process by global mesh refinement.

Max Displacement Max von


Mesh Element size Number Number of Number displacement convergence Mises stress Stress
number h (mm) of nodes elements of DOF (mm) error (MPa) convergence error
1 20 194 78 1098 0.11723 Unknown 308.8 Unknown
2 10 822 374 4806 0.11792 0.59% 297.1 4%
3 5 3142 1498 18606 0.11821 0.25% 337.9 12%
4 2.5 12284 5596 73218 0.11824 0.03% 364.3 7%
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 4 Controlling Discretization Errors 39

FIGURE 4.6 Global mesh refinement; convergence of maximum displacement. The


maximum displacement is a function of 1/h, where h is the element size.

0.1184

0.1182

0.1180
Displacement [mm]

0.1178

0.1176

0.1174
© SAE International.

0.1172
0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35 0.4
1/h [mm–1]

FIGURE 4.7 Global mesh refinement; convergence of maximum von Mises stress. The
maximum stress is a function of 1/h, where h is the element size.

400

360
Stress [MPa]

320

Nodal stress
280 Element stress

240
© SAE International.

200
0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35 0.4
1/h [mm–1]
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

40 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

with mesh refinement. Note the “dip” in the nodal stresses graph shown in Figure 4.7 caused
by error of stress averaging, which is a part of nodal stress calculations.
Having completed four steps of the h convergence process by global mesh refinement,
we notice that displacements converge faster than stresses. To explain this, we need to
differentiate between global and local results. The maximum displacement is a global result;
the stiffness of the entire model contributes to the maximum displacement results. Global
results converge faster with mesh refinement. The maximum stress (here, von Mises stress)
is a local result and is modeled only by a few elements; for faster convergence of the maximum
stress, we would need a more aggressive refinement around stress concentration.

4.2.2. h Convergence by Local Mesh Refinement


An alternative to refining mesh everywhere is a local mesh refinement that produces meshes
shown in Figure 4.8.

FIGURE 4.8 The same model meshed with shell elements of the same global size but
different sizes along the controlled entity: the edge of the hole. Mesh bias expressed in
millimeters characterizes the element size on the entity where the bias has been applied.

Mesh 1
Global element size 20 mm
No mesh bias

Mesh 2
Global element size 20 mm
Mesh bias 10 mm

Mesh 3
Global element size 20 mm
Mesh bias 5 mm

Mesh 4
Globak element size 20 mm
© SAE International.

Mesh bias 2.5 mm


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 4 Controlling Discretization Errors 41

Local mesh refinement adds fewer DOFs to the model as compared to the global
mesh refinement, and models solve faster. h convergence process by local mesh refine-
ment is easier to execute than a global mesh refinement, but the h convergence process
by the local mesh refinement requires prerequisite knowledge of stress pattern in the
analyzed model; we need to know where to apply the mesh bias. There is a risk of not
finding stress concentrations if mesh refinement is applied in an incorrect
location.
Von Mises stress results produced by four meshes used in the h convergence process
by the local mesh refinement are shown in Figure 4.9; a convergence graph of the maximum
von Mises stress (nodal) is shown in Figure 4.10.

FIGURE 4.9 Von Mises stress results produced by four different meshes representing the
same problem. This illustrates h convergence process by local mesh refinement.

308.8
283.9
259.0
234.1
209.2
184.4 Mesh 1
159.5
Element size 20 mm
134.6
109.7
No mesh bias
84.8 Max. von Mises stress 308.8 MPa
59.9

307.8
282.2
256.6
231.0
205.5
179.9 Mesh 2
154.3 Global element size 20 mm
128.7 Mesh bias 10 mm
103.1 Max. von Mises stress 307.8 MPa
77.6
52.0

367.9
334.8
301.6
268.5
235.4
202.2 Mesh 3
169.1
136.0
Global element size 20 mm
102.9 Mesh bias 5 mm
69.7 Max. von Mises stress 367.9 MPa
36.6

375.4
340.4
305.4
270.4
235.5
200.5 Mesh 4
© SAE International.

165.5 Element size 20 mm


130.5 Mesh bias 2.5 mm
95.5 Max. von Mises stress 375.4 MPa
60.6
25.6
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

42 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 4.10 Convergence of maximum von Mises stress during h convergence by local
mesh refinement. The maximum stress is a function of 1/h, where h is the element size. “Dip”
in stress in the second iteration is caused by an error of stress averaging.

380

360

Stress [MPa]

340

320

© SAE International.
300
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
1/h [mm–1]

4.2.3. A
 daptive h Convergence
h convergence analysis by global mesh refinement is time consuming because the number
of DOFs increases while the element size is reduced, and that increases solution time. h
convergence analysis by local mesh refinement is faster because local mesh refinement has
less effect on the increase of the number of DOFs in the model, but it requires the user’s
decision on where to refine the mesh. This disadvantage of the local h convergence process
is avoided when an adaptive h convergence solution is used.
In the adaptive h convergence process, the mesh is refined automatically during an
iterative solution. The initial mesh is defined by the user and a solution is obtained; let us
call it Iteration #1. Based on the errors found in Iteration #1, the mesh is automatically
refined in the locations characterized by high errors, and a new solution is obtained; this
is Iteration #2. Iterations continue until the user-specified accuracy has been satisfied or
the number of allowed iterations has been reached. The user does not have direct control
over how the final mesh will look like.
The name “adaptive” derives from the fact that mesh refinement is adapted to locations
where errors are found. The measure of error is related to the difference between nodal
stress and element stresses. Consecutive mesh refinements during the h adaptive conver-
gence process are illustrated in Figure 4.11.
A hollow plate is subjected to a uniform tension causing stress concentrations on the
cylindrical surface of the hole, and the mesh is automatically refined there. There are
important differences between this problem and that shown in Figures 4.5 and 4.9. First,
the model is subjected to tension on both end faces and stresses are perfectly symmetric.
Second, because of its larger thickness, the problem requires 3D solid elements rather than
3D shell elements or 2D plate elements. Lower stresses are reported because the thickness
increased while the load remains the same. The summary of results of the h adaptive
convergence process is shown in Figure 4.12.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 4 Controlling Discretization Errors 43

FIGURE 4.11 Von Mises stresses plots in five iterations of an h adaptive


convergence process.

Iteration # 1
Initial mesh defined by user
von Mises stress 106.1 MPa

Iteration # 3
Mesh after the second refinement
von Mises stress 125.6 MPa
© SAE International.

Iteration # 5
Mesh after the fourth refinement
von Mises stress 126.5 MPa
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

44 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 4.12 Convergence of the maximum von Mises stress in the h adaptive process;
the maximum von Mises stress is shown as a function of the iteration number.

130

125

120
Stress [MPa]

115

110

© SAE International.
105
1 2 3 4 5
Iteration number

4.2.4. p Convergence Process


We discussed three variations of the h convergence process: global, local, and adaptive. In
all cases the element size is reduced, but the element order stays the same. In the p conver-
gence process, the mesh stays the same but the element order is upgraded. The process is
called p convergence (p stands for polynomial) because the polynomial order of element
displacement interpolation functions changes. p convergence process requires elements
capable of upgrading their order.
In a direct analogy to global mesh refinement (uniform refinement) and local mesh
refinement (non-uniform refinement) used in the h convergence process, the p convergence
process can also be uniform or non-uniform. In a uniform p convergence process, the order
of all elements is upgraded until the desired accuracy is obtained. The advantage of uniform
element upgrade is that mesh compatibility is assured because the same displacement
interpolation functions are used on all faces and all edges of all elements, but a uniform
element order upgrade produces very long solution times. To assure mesh compatibility in
a non-uniform (called adaptive) p convergence process, different displacement interpolation
functions must be used on different edges and faces of the same element; this is done to
assure that displacements on the adjacent edges and faces of the neighboring elements are
described by the same displacement interpolation functions. The face and edge order are
“adapted” to the actual stress pattern, and “quiet” portions of the model can be left at lower
p orders for faster solution. A dedicated p element mesher is required to take full advantage
of p elements. All commercial p element programs use p adaptive convergence because a
non-adaptive p convergence would not be numerically efficient.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 4 Controlling Discretization Errors 45

FIGURE 4.13 The p element mesh (top), the final edge element order after seven
iterations (middle), and von Mises stress results after seven iterations in a p adaptive
solution process.

p element mesh
with six elements

p=9
p=8
p=7
p=6
p=4 Edge order after seven iterations
p=3
the highest order p = 7
p=2
p=1
© SAE International.

von Mises stresses


after seven iterations

When a dedicated p element mesher is used, the mesh looks very different from the h
element mesh as shown in Figure 4.13.
The mesh in Figure 4.13 is a result of the discretization of a surface; it consists of only
six shell elements: two triangular elements and four quadrilateral elements. The model is
subjected to a uniform tensile load applied to both vertical edges. The model is solved with
a program that can use element order anywhere between p = 1 and p = 9. In this case the
numbers between 1 and 9 refer to the order of the stress interpolation function, not the
displacement interpolation function. The final element order is found after several iterations
during which the edge order is increased selectively based on the errors found in the previous
iteration. This happens in direct analogy to h adaptive convergence process. The results of
the p convergence process are summarized in Figure 4.14.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

46 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 4.14 Convergence of the maximum von Mises stress in the p adaptive process;
the maximum von Mises stress is shown as a function of the iteration number. The accuracy
requirements have been satisfied at p = 7 and further element order upgrade was
not required.

450

400

350
Stress [MPa]

300

250

200

© SAE International.
150
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Iteration number

4.2.5. Choice of Convergence Process


Most commercial FEM programs use h elements. For those programs, the h adaptive
convergence, if available for the given type of analysis, offers the advantages of automatic
mesh refinements adapted to the identified stress patterns. Some native h element programs
do support p elements even though p element meshes are created using an h element mesher
rather than a dedicated p element mesher. This allows users’ familiarization with both h
and p element technology. However, the best performance of an h element program is
achieved in the native h element mode.

4.3. Discretization Error


A convergence graph shown schematically in Figure 4.15 summarizes the results of a conver-
gence process. For clarity of this illustration, the graph is based on three iterations only.
This graph could have been produced by any type of convergence processes: h convergence
global, h convergence local, h convergence adaptive, or p convergence adaptive. The itera-
tion number is on the ordinate and data of interest are on the abscissa.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 4 Controlling Discretization Errors 47

FIGURE 4.15 A schematic convergence curve is used to define convergence error and
solution error. The convergence curve tends to the asymptote shown as a dashed line.

Solution error
Convergence error
Data of interest
© SAE International.

1 2 3
Iteration number

4.3.1. Convergence Error


A convergence error is the difference in results between two consecutive iterations. It is
convenient to normalize the error to make it dimensionless. If we do that, the convergence
error for iteration n is defined as

result  n   result  n  1
Convergence error  (4.1)
result  n 

Figure 4.15 shows the convergence error of the last performed iteration which is the
third iteration. Using Equation 4.1, the convergence error can be calculated for all steps of
the convergence process except Step 1. The convergence error for Step 1 is unknown because
no prior results exist. We can rephrase this important observation by saying that a single
run produces results with unknown discretization error.

4.3.2. Solution Error


By adding DOFs to the model during the convergence process, the FE model solution
approaches the exact solution of the continuous mathematical model. That unknown
solution is the limit to which the data of interest converge. The asymptotic value may be used
to define the discretization error in another way; this is the solution error. The solution
error is the difference between results produced by the FE model and the results that would
be produced by a hypothetical FE model with an infinite number of infinitesimally small
elements. This hypothetical model with an infinite number of elements would not be any
different from a continuous mathematical model.

result  n   asymptotic result


Solution error  (4.2)
result  n 
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

48 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

Since the asymptotic solution is not known, we can only estimate the solution error,
but we cannot calculate it exactly.

4.4. P
 roblems with Convergence
The FE model solution converges to the exact solution of the mathematical model on which
the model is based. Both h and p convergence processes demonstrated so far demonstrated
that the data of interest converge to finite values. But this is not always the case.

4.4.1. Stress Singularity


We are looking for the maximum von Mises stress in a thin L-shape bracket. The bracket
is modeled as a 2D plane stress problem and is meshed initially with large h elements as
shown in Figure 4.16. It is important to note that this 2D model is not capable of modeling
buckling, which may be the dominant mode of failure. We use a 2D model only to demon-
strate stress singularity.
We conduct an h convergence process by global mesh refinement starting with an
element size of 8 mm as shown in Figure 4.16. The element size is split in half in each itera-
tion until it reaches 0.25 mm in the sixth iteration. A summary of the maximum von Mises
stress results is shown in Figure 4.17. In all six iterations, the maximum stress is in the sharp
reentrant edge. The maximum stress of 73.7 MPa (element size 0.25 mm) is over 2.5 times
higher than the yield strength of the material (1060 Aluminum Alloy) which is 27.6 MPa.
Figure 4.18 shows the results of the last performed iteration with an element size of 0.25 mm.

FIGURE 4.16 A thin L bracket is represented by a flat surface and discretized with a
coarse mesh of 2D plane stress elements.

Fixed restraint to top

© SAE International.

50 N
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 4 Controlling Discretization Errors 49

FIGURE 4.17 The maximum von Mises stress as a function of 1/h, where h is the
element size.

80.0

70.0

60.0
Stress [MPa]

50.0

40.0

30.0

20.0
© SAE International.

10.0
0 1 2 3 4
1/h [mm ] –1

FIGURE 4.18 Von Mises stress plot produced by mesh with an element size of 0.25 mm.

73.7

67.5

61.4

55.3

49.1

43.0

36.8

30.7

24.6

18.4

12.3
© SAE International.

6.1

0.0

Yield strength: 27.6


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

50 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

To find the accuracy of this result, we need to examine if stress converges to a finite
value. However, the graph in Figure 4.17 shows no sign of converging to a finite value; instead,
each iteration brings a higher stress result; the maximum stress diverges to infinity. This
happens because the mathematical model does not offer a solution for maximum stress.
The sharp reentrant edge (or corner in 2D model) creates a singularity where the stress is
infinite. Since the objective of the analysis is to find the maximum stress, we conclude that
the FE model is based on the wrong mathematical model. The mathematical model with
stress singularity that coincides with the location of the maximum stress cannot be used
as a basis for the FE model if the objective is to find the maximum stress.
Why did the FE model produce high, but finite, stress instead of infinite stress as
predicted by the mathematical model? This is because the modeling error (using the wrong
mathematical model) is masked by the discretization error. As a result of that, finite stress
is produced where the mathematical model predicts infinite stress.
The stress singularity in the model in Figure 4.16 is caused by a 270° sharp reentrant
corner, but any re-entrant corner in a 2D model or a reentrant edge in a 3D model produces
stress singularity.
The strength of a singularity increases with the angle of the sharp reentrant edge.
Singularities manifest themselves as “hot spots.” To visualize singular stresses caused by the
225° edge, a more aggressive mesh refinement is required as compared to the stress singularity
caused by the 270° edge. Comparing the three models (in Figure 4.19), the singularity in the
model with a 225° edge is the weakest and the singularity in the model with a 340° edge is
the strongest. The strength of singularity indicates how fast stresses diverge to infinity.
By showing the divergence of the data of interest (here the maximum von Mises stress),
the convergence process revealed the modeling error. We can remedy this situation by using
a different mathematical model; one that does not have a stress singularity. The most obvious
way is to model a fillet, which is always present in a real part, even if the edge is very sharp.
The result may show very high stress, but that result will be bounded; it will converge to a
finite value. Another way of eliminating stress singularity is to use a material model capable
of modeling plasticity. To illustrate this, we will use an elastic-perfectly plastic model
characterized by a strain-stress curve in Figure 4.20.
The elastic-perfectly plastic material model limits the maximum von Mises stress to
the plasticity limit; this eliminates stress singularity even though strain in the sharp reen-
trant edge continues diverging with mesh refinement. Von Mises stress results using elastic-
perfectly plastic material and element size of 0.5 mm are shown in Figure 4.21. The solution
shown in Figure 4.21 has been reached in 14 steps during which the load was gradually
increased to the maximum of 50 N. The maximum von Mises stress for each step is shown
in Figure 4.22.
Stresses in the location close to singularity are entirely dependent on the choice of
discretization and, therefore, are meaningless. By manipulating element size, element order,
or both, we can produce any result we want. Using geometry with sharp reentrant corners
in 2D models or sharp reentrant edges in 3D models, while the objective is finding stress
in that location, is a severe yet common modeling error. An erroneous model is shown in
Figure 4.23. This model still can be used for the analysis of displacement because a sharp
reentrant edge does not cause displacement singularities. It can also be used for stress
analysis in a location distant from sharp reentrant edges. It is important to mention that
fillets cannot be ignored, even if stresses along the edge are not of interest if the removal of
fillets changes the model stiffness significantly. If stresses along the edge are of interest,
then fillets, no matter how small, must be modeled (Figure 4.24). Stresses in the fillet may
be very high but, during a convergence process, they will converge to a finite limit.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 4 Controlling Discretization Errors 51

FIGURE 4.19 All sharp reentrant edges shown here produce stress singularity. The closer
the edge to 360° the stronger the singularity.

340°

270°
© SAE International.

225°

FIGURE 4.20 Elastic-perfectly plastic material, von Mises type; this illustration shows the
strain-stress curve of 1060 Aluminum Alloy. The material behaves linearly until the stress
reaches 27.6 MPa, and then the modulus of elasticity becomes zero. Von Mises stress is used
as a measure to control the switch of the modulus of elasticity to zero.

30

20
Stress [MPa]

10
© SAE International.

0
0.0000 0.0005 0.0010 0.0015
Strain [1]
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

52 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 4.21 Von Mises stress solution using elastic-perfectly plastic material and
element size of 0.5 mm. This illustration shows the results of Step 14. This is the last step in
the iterative mesh refinement process.

27.6

25.3

23.0

20.7

18.4

16.1

13.8

11.5

9.2

6.9

4.6

2.3

© SAE International.
0.0

Yield strength: 27.6

FIGURE 4.22 Changes in the maximum von Mises stress during 14 steps of solution using
elastic-perfectly plastic material.

30

20
Stress [MPa]

10
© SAE International.

0
0% 20% 40% 60% 80% 100%
Load
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 4 Controlling Discretization Errors 53

FIGURE 4.23 This model cannot be used for analysis of the maximum stress because the
maximum stresses (most likely) will coincide with the stress singularity caused by the sharp
reentrant edge.
© SAE International.

Model geometry Finite element mesh

FIGURE 4.24 This model has a fillet (red) added in place of the sharp reentrant edge. It
can be used for analysis of the maximum stress. Notice a mesh control defined on the fillet to
produce correctly sized and correctly shaped elements.
© SAE International.

Model geometry Finite element mesh


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

54 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

4.4.2. Displacement Singularity


We need to find displacements of a wedge. The load is applied to the top face, and fixed
restraints are applied to the bottom edge. The restraints applied to the bottom edge would
act as a hinge allowing rotation about the edge. Therefore, the wedge is held in position by
rollers along two sides (Figure 4.25).
Three solutions are obtained using progressively more refined meshes. The local refine-
ment is applied along the supported edge. Stress results produced by three meshes are shown
in Figure 4.26 and are summarized in the graph in Figure 4.27. The divergence of the
maximum stress demonstrates stress singularity.
Does this model produce meaningful displacement results? To answer this question,
we need to examine the convergence of displacements. Displacement results shown in Figure
4.28 and summarized in Figure 4.29 demonstrate the divergence of displacements.
The graph in Figure 4.29 shows the divergence of displacements with mesh refinement.
Finite (and not infinite) displacement results are due to discretization error that conceals
both displacement and stress singularity. Line support and point support are mathematical
abstracts, just like a sharp reentrant edge or a sharp reentrant corner. They can never exist
in a real structure and should not be used in FE models. Displacement and stress singulari-
ties are summarized in Table 4.2.
Singularities are modeling errors introduced when formulating mathematical models.
They are not caused by finite element approximation. Singularities, like other modeling
errors, are introduced before the FEA enters the stage. Singularities can be revealed in the
convergence process, but no corrective action is possible unless the mathematical model
is changed.
The presence of singularity does not necessarily make all results incorrect, but we must
be aware of the limitations imposed by the existence of a singularity. For example, a model
with sharp reentrant edges is incorrect if the objective is to find stress close to that edge. If
the data of interest are displacements or modes of vibration, then the model with stress
singularities may be acceptable. This is valid if the elimination of sharp reentrant edges
from model geometry does not change stiffness significantly.

FIGURE 4.25 A wedge is loaded at the top and supported along the bottom edge. Side
faces are restrained by rollers.

Rollers
© SAE International.

Fixed support
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 4 Controlling Discretization Errors 55

FIGURE 4.26 The maximum stress diverges because of stress singularity caused by the
edge support. Element size along the supported edge is shown. Refinement is done using
mesh bias. Undeformed plots are shown.

61.9
55.8
49.6
43.5
37.4
31.3
25.1
10 mm 19.0
12.9
6.8
0.6

310.4
279.4
248.4
217.5
186.5
155.5
124.5
2 mm 93.6
62.6
31.6
0.6
545.2
490.7
436.2
381.7
327.3
272.8
218.3
1 mm 163.8
© SAE International.

109.3
54.8
0.4
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

56 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 4.27 The maximum von Mises stress in the three models is shown in Figure 4.26.
Stress is plotted as a function of 1/h, where h is the element size along the supported edge.

600

500

400
Stress [MPa]

300

200

100

© SAE International.
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
1/h [mm ]
–1
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 4 Controlling Discretization Errors 57

FIGURE 4.28 The maximum displacement magnitude diverges because of displacement


singularity caused by the edge support. Undeformed plots are shown. Element size along the
supported edge is shown. Refinement is done using mesh bias.

0.0024
0.0021
0.0019
0.0017
0.0014
0.0012

10 mm 0.0010
0.0007
0.0005
0.0002
0.0000
0.0027
0.0024
0.0021
0.0019
0.0016
0.0013
0.0011
2 mm 0.0008
0.0005
0.0003
0.0000
0.0030
0.0027
0.0024
0.0021
0.0018
0.0015
0.0012
1 mm 0.0009
© SAE International.

0.0006
0.0003
0.0000
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

58 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 4.29 The displacements in the three models are shown in Figure 4.28.
Displacement is plotted as a function of 1/h, where h is the element size along the supported
edge. Displacement results diverge.

0.0031

Displacement [mm]

0.0028

0.0026

© SAE International.
0.0023
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
1/h [mm–1]

TABLE 4.2 Types of singularities encountered in FE models.

Type 1 Type 2
Stress Infinite Infinite
Strain energy Finite Infinite
Displacement Finite Infinite
Examples Sharp reentrant edge Point or edge support

4.5. Hands-On Exercises


4.5.1. HOLLOW PLATE
Description
Tensile load (magenta arrows) is applied to the left vertical face. Restraints (red arrows) are
defined on the right vertical face in the direction normal to the face; these restraints generate
reaction force. There are also restraints defined on two corners (blue and green arrows).
These restraints are necessary to eliminate three Rigid Body Motions (RBMs). The geometry
is suitable for meshing with solid elements (Figure 4.30).

Objective
This exercise illustrates a convergence process and demonstrates how the data of interest
(the maximum displacement in the direction of load and the maximum von Mises stress)
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 4 Controlling Discretization Errors 59

FIGURE 4.30 HOLLOW PLATE model. Tensile load (magenta arrows) is applied to left
vertical face. Restraints defined on the right vertical face (red arrows) in the direction normal
to face generate reaction. Restraints defined on two corners (blue and green arrows)
eliminate Rigid Body Motions without interfering with plate deformation.
© SAE International.

change while the element size is reduced during several steps of mesh refinement (h conver-
gence) or during several steps of element order upgrade (p convergence).

Procedure

•• Apply the material properties (steel).


•• Apply 100000 N of uniformly distributed tensile load to the left vertical face.
•• Apply restraints to balance the load and eliminate RBMs without creating stress
singularities.
•• Mesh using first order solid elements.
•• Obtain the displacement and stress solution.
•• Repeat Steps 4 and 5, each time meshing with smaller elements; this is h convergence
process by global mesh refinement. The convergence process should consist of at
least three iterations.
•• Plot the displacement and stress result as a function of the number of DOFs in the
model. Each curve will consist of three points corresponding to three steps in the
mesh refinement process. If your software does not provide information on the
number of DOFs in the model, use the inverse of the element size on the abscissa.
•• Repeat the exercise using second order solid elements; notice that results converge faster.
•• Repeat the exercise using h adaptive solution with the second order elements if your
program supports this option; only the initial mesh will be required, and it may be a
coarse one. The number of automatic mesh refinements will depend on the accuracy
requirements specified in the h adaptive analysis definition.
•• Repeat the exercise using p type elements if your software supports this option;
only the initial mesh will be required, and it may be a coarse one. The number of
automatic steps will depend on the requested accuracy specified in the p adaptive
analysis definition.
•• Observe the convergence of displacement and stress in all solutions.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

60 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

•• Delete all restraints and define a fixed restraint applied on the face opposite to the
loaded face. Notice that stress singularities are now present in the corners of the
supported face. These singularities are difficult to spot when global mesh refinement
is used because stress concentration becomes visible only when a very fine mesh
is used.

4.5.2. L BRACKET01
Description
The L bracket is represented by a surface and meshed with 2D plane stress elements. This
model is not intended for analysis of buckling even though this may be the primary mode
of failure. Fixed restraints are applied to the top edge (blue line). The bending load (red
arrow) is evenly distributed over the right vertical edge (Figure 4.31).

Objective
This exercise illustrates the lack of convergence of stress due to the stress singularity in the
sharp reentrant corner. The stress singularity makes the model useless if the objective is to
find the maximum stress because the location of the maximum stress is coincident with
the stress singularity.

Procedure

•• Apply the material properties (Aluminum Alloy).


•• Define the model thickness to 10 mm.
•• Define the fixed support to the top edge.

FIGURE 4.31 L BRACKET01 model. Fixed restraint is applied to the top edge (blue line).
Bending load is evenly distributed over the right vertical edge. This model is not intended for
analysis of buckling even though this may be the primary mode of failure.

© SAE International.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 4 Controlling Discretization Errors 61

•• Define the uniformly distributed bending load to 200 N.


•• Mesh with coarse, medium, and fine mesh with second order 2D plane stress
elements.
•• Plot the displacement and stress result as a function of the number of DOFs in the
model. Each curve will consist of three points corresponding to three steps in the
mesh refinement process.

4.5.3. W
 EDGE
Description
The wedge is held between rollers acting on two side faces to prevent tilting sideways. Fixed
restraints are applied to the sharp edge. A pressure of 1.25 MPa is applied to the top face
(Figure 4.32).

Objective
Demonstrate divergence of displacements and stresses in the model with displacement and
stress singularities caused by restraints applied to the entity with zero area (edge).

Procedure

•• Apply the material properties (steel).


•• Apply a fixed restraint to the sharp edge.

FIGURE 4.32 WEDGE model.


© SAE International.

Support
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

62 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

•• Apply restraints eliminating displacements in the direction normal to the two side
faces to prevent tilting.
•• Apply a pressure of 1.25 MPa to the top face.
•• Mesh with solid elements of global size 10 mm and solve. Then apply mesh bias of
2 mm and 1 mm along the sharp edge (three runs).
•• Plot the displacement and stress result as a function of the inverse of element size
along the sharp edge. Each curve will consist of three points corresponding to three
steps in the mesh refinement process.
•• Repeat the exercise using h adaptive solution; only one mesh will be required.
•• Repeat the exercise using p adaptive solution; only one mesh will be required.
•• Observe the divergence of displacements and stresses as demonstrated by the h
convergence process with mesh bias, h adaptive convergence process, and p adaptive
convergence process.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

5
Finite Element Mesh

W
e have already introduced several types of finite elements when discussing the
convergence process. Now we focus on how the elements are assembled into
a mesh. We will review different methods of creating FE mesh as well as the
issues of mesh compatibility, mesh quality, and mesh adequacy.

5.1. Meshing Techniques


5.1.1. Manual Meshing
FEA was used as a tool of engineering analysis long before CAD was introduced and before
graphic user interfaces became available. To create a mesh, one had to input the coordinates
of all nodes and then construct elements by defining element connectivity to selected nodes.
Later, a manual meshing process was improved by rudimentary geometry creation capabili-
ties so that the positions of nodes could be defined with the help of underlying geometry.
That eventually led to mapped meshing requiring the user to define only key points and
lines and the number of nodes along lines connecting the key points. Surfaces and volume
defined by key points and connecting curves could then be meshed automatically and was
called mapped meshing (Figure 5.1).
Manual meshing and mapped meshing were time consuming and prone to errors.
Those techniques are now of historical importance only, and very few commercial programs
still support manual meshing or mapped meshing techniques.

© 2023 SAE International 65


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

66 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 5.1 A sprocket model meshed with shell elements using a mapped
meshing technique.

© SAE International.
5.1.2. Semi-automatic Meshing
Semi-automatic meshing techniques can be explained with concepts borrowed from CAD.
Just like a solid feature can be created in CAD by extruding or revolving a flat sketch, a
mesh can be created by extruding or revolving a planar surface. That surface needs to
be meshed first with 2D elements and extrusion (Figure 5.2) or revolution (Figure 5.3) is
done in several steps depending on how many layers of elements we need to create. Semi-
automatic meshing is a powerful technique but, by its underlying principle, is limited to a
narrow class of shapes. Just like manual meshing, it is now of historical importance only.

FIGURE 5.2 A mesh created with p elements by extruding a meshed flat surface in ten
steps to create ten layers of elements. Mesh is shown with element shrinkage applied.

© SAE International.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 5 Finite Element Mesh 67

FIGURE 5.3 A mesh created with p elements by revolving the meshed radial cross-
section in twelve steps along a 360° arc. Mesh is shown with element shrinkage applied.
© SAE International.

5.1.3. Automatic Meshing


Automatic meshing, commonly just called meshing, is the only meshing technique available
in modern, general-use FEA programs. It is the only practical meshing choice for complex
models. In some programs, meshing is done in the background and is invisible to users.
More often, FEA programs offer some control over the meshing process by allowing users
to control characteristic element size (Figure 5.4) and mesh bias (Figures 5.5 through 5.7).
The type of elements created by a mesher depends on the type of geometry submitted
for meshing. Meshing volumes (solid CAD geometry) creates solid elements; meshing 3D
surfaces creates shell or membrane elements; meshing curves creates beam elements;
meshing 2D planes creates 2D plate elements. Elements created by meshing different types
of geometry are summarized in Table 5.1.

FIGURE 5.4 Model meshed with large and small elements. This is what we used in the h
convergence process by global mesh refinement. Second order elements are used, they map
precisely to cylindrical faces of all holes in both coarse and fine meshes.
© SAE International.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

68 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 5.5 Mesh control (mesh bias) applied to selected edges produces smaller
elements along these edges.

© SAE International.
FIGURE 5.6 Mesh controls (mesh bias) applied to selected faces (two cylindrical holes)
produce smaller elements on these faces.

© SAE International.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 5 Finite Element Mesh 69

FIGURE 5.7 Mesh control applied to a vertex produces smaller elements around the
selected corner.
© SAE International.

TABLE 5.1 Element types created by meshing different geometric entities.

Model dimensionality Geometry meshed Elements created


3D Volume* Solid elements
Surface Shell elements
Membrane elements
Curve Beam elements
2D Flat surface Plate elements
1D Line Spring elements
Bar elements
* Volume geometry is called solid geometry in CAD terminology.

Hexahedral (brick) solid elements are difficult for meshers; the same applies, to a
lesser degree, to quadrilateral shell elements. For this reason, meshers found in commercial
FEA software are often limited to creating tetrahedral solid elements and triangular
shell elements.

5.2. Mesh Compatibility


Sometimes it is necessary or advantageous to use different types of elements in one mesh.
but using different types of elements in the same mesh brings up the issue of
mesh compatibility.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

70 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

5.2.1. Compatible Elements


Two elements are compatible if they produce a continuous displacement field across the
element boundary. Depending on the element type, this boundary may be a face (solid
element), edge (3D shell, 2D plate), or point (beam element). This requires that displace-
ment interpolation functions describing displacements on neighboring element edges
or faces are identical. If the elements are the same, this condition is automatically satis-
fied because element displacement interpolation functions along the edge are the same
(Figure 5.8).

FIGURE 5.8 Two elements joined along an edge are shown as if they shared one edge,
but these are two coincident edges. For two elements to be compatible, the displacement
interpolation functions describing displacements of the edge belonging to element 1 and the
displacement interpolation function describing the displacement of the edge belonging to
element 2 must be the same. This requirement is automatically satisfied if the elements are of
the same type and order as the above two first order triangular shell elements.

Element 2
First order

Element 1
First order

© SAE International.
5.2.2. Incompatible Elements
If connecting elements are not of the same type, compatibility conditions are not auto-
matically satisfied, and compatibility must be enforced by imposed compatibility
called links.
The elements shown in Figure 5.9 are not compatible. The displacement interpolation
function along the edge of element 1 is of the second order while the displacement inter-
polation function along the edge of element 2 is of the first order. There is nothing “telling”
the mid-side node on the edge belonging to element 1 to follow the displacements of edge
2. As a result, a gap or an overlap will form between the two elements when they deform
under load. Similarly, there is an incompatibility in the mesh in Figure 5.10 even though
the mesh consists of only one element type. A closer look at the transition between small
and large elements reveals that the refined part of the mesh is connected to the coarse part
of the mesh only by two nodes. This results in a gap forming under a tensile load.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 5 Finite Element Mesh 71

FIGURE 5.9 Since the mid-side node on edge of element 1 is not attached to the edge of
element 2, a gap or overlap will form when load is applied. Mesh incompatibility occurs due to
the different order of the connected elements.

Element 2
First order

Element 1
Second order
© SAE International.

This node belongs to element 1


It is not connected to the edge of element 2

FIGURE 5.10 The left and right sides of the mesh share only two nodes (red). This is not
evident if the mesh is shown in the undeformed shape (top), but clearly shows under the
tensile load (bottom). This illustration was created in an old FEA program. Using a modern
mesher, it would take some effort to create intentionally this incorrect mesh.

Before deformation
© SAE International.

After deformation

5.2.3. Forced Compatibility


Mesh compatibility may be enforced in an incompatible mesh. This is done by linking all
displacement components of entities (points, edges, faces) belonging to the first group of
elements to the corresponding entities of the second group of elements as illustrated in
Figure 5.11 (linking edges) and Figure 5.12 (linking faces). When displacements of two entities
are linked, one entity becomes “master,” the other becomes “slave.” Displacements of the
slave entity must follow the corresponding displacements of the master entity.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

72 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 5.11 The spokes, meshed with shell elements, are connected to the hub and to
the rim meshed with solid elements. The mesh is incompatible because nodes of shell
elements have six DOFs while nodes of solid elements have three DOFs.

© SAE International.
FIGURE 5.12 The flat part of the model is meshed with solid hexahedral p elements, and
the curved part is meshed with solid tetrahedral p elements. The edges of tetrahedral
elements running diagonally across the faces of solid elements are not connected to the faces
of solid elements. To eliminate incompatibility, links are required between the corresponding
faces of tetrahedral and hexahedral elements. The location of links is indicated by a
dashed line.

© SAE International.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 5 Finite Element Mesh 73

The rotational DOFs along the edges of the shell elements that connect to the edges of
solid elements are not restrained, and unintentional hinges are created. Links must
be defined to constrain translations and rotations of the edges of the shell element to trans-
lations of the corresponding edges of solid elements. Edges of solid elements become
“masters” and edges of shell elements become “slaves.” Links suppress rotations of edges of
shell elements. The rim and the hub are meshed with large elements for clarity in this
illustration. An analysis would require much smaller elements.
Links assure a continuous displacement field, but should not be used in the location
where accurate stress results are required.

5.3. C
 ommon Meshing Problems
New FEA users often expect that meshing should be a fully automated process requiring
little, in any, input from the user. With experience comes a realization that meshing is not
a hands-off task. Instead, it is often a difficult and time-consuming process that requires
user’s input. Leaving the mesher on the default settings may lead to severe meshing errors,
therefore most FEA programs provide users with meshing controls.

5.3.1. Element Distortion


When elements are assembled in a mesh, the shape of elements must be distorted to map
elements onto the model geometry. The distortion from the ideal shape results can take
different forms shown in Figures 5.13–5.16. Aspect ratio and curvature distortion (high turn
angle) are the most common types of element distortions.
Every element is designed to work properly within a certain range of shape distortion.
Exactly how much distortion and what type of distortion is allowed before element degen-
erates depend on the factors like element type, numerical procedures used in the element
design, etc. Distorted elements can be detected using mesh quality tools available in most
commercial FEA programs and, with some training, can be spotted “by eye.”

FIGURE 5.13 Aspect ratio. A regular tetrahedron and two distorted tetrahedrons with
excessive aspect ratios.
© SAE International.

Regular tetrahedron “Flat” tetrahedron “Wedge” tetrahedron


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

74 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 5.14 Curvature distortion. Elements with high curvature distortion are indicated
by the arrows. The curvature distortion applies only to the second order and higher because
the first order elements cannot have curved edges.

Turn angle 90°

© SAE International.
Turn angle 45°

FIGURE 5.15 Tangent edges. Elements with tangent edges are indicated by the arrows.

© SAE International.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 5 Finite Element Mesh 75

FIGURE 5.16 Warpage. Warped surface shown with zebra stripes and warped shell
element mesh.
© SAE International.

While element distortion is easy to detect, it may be difficult to control. Recall that
meshing is basically a process of filling up a given volume or surface with certain geometric
shapes; most often with triangles or tetrahedrons. The mesher often finds it impossible to
accomplish its task while keeping the elements within the allowable range of distortion.

5.3.2. Mesh Adequacy


Consider a pure moment applied to a beam (Figure 5.17). The beam is erroneously meshed
with one layer of first order elements across the beam thickness and that cannot capture
the mechanics of bending as explained in Figure 5.18.
The finite element mesh intended for modeling bending must be capable of modeling
at least the linear distribution of in-plane stress across the thickness, but that cannot be done
with one layer of first order elements. Using one layer of first order elements across the
thickness models constant stress and does not capture the mechanics of bending.
Modeling bending requires higher-order elements. If only bending, and not a more complex
stress pattern, needs to be modeled, then one layer of second order elements suffices because it
can represent the linear distribution of stress across the thickness. However, it is generally recom-
mended to use at least two layers of second order elements to be able to capture more complex
stress patterns. Thin features like walls are well modeled with shell elements (Figure 5.19).

FIGURE 5.17 Beam subjected to pure bending is meshed with one layer of first order
element across the thickness. Arrows indicate the moment applied to two end faces; the
visible end face is shown in green color.
© SAE International.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

76 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 5.18 Pure bending produces linear stress distribution of in-plane stresses across
the beam thickness.

Correct
Bending Linear stress distribution across
Second order element
Moment the element thickness is modeled
with one layer of second order elements

© SAE International.
Wrong
Bending Constant stress distribution across
First order element
Moment the element thickness is modeled
with one layer of first order elements

FIGURE 5.19 Beam in pure bending is correctly modeled with one layer of second order
elements (top). It can be also modeled with shell elements (middle) because shell elements
model linear distribution of in-plane (bending) stresses. A more complex state of stress
requires two, or more, layers of second order elements (bottom).

Solid element mesh with one


layer of second order elements

Shell element mesh

Solid element mesh with two layers

© SAE International.
of second order elements

5.3.3. Element Mapping to Geometry


The elements should be small enough to capture important details of geometry; too large
elements cannot model geometry details (Figure 5.20). Problems shown in Figure 5.20
are purposely exaggerated by using large first order elements, but models with similar
mapping errors are often found in everyday practice. Meshing of relatively simple
geometry often requires a well-refined second order element mesh (Figure 5.21). Notice
that meshing gets easier when p elements are used. p elements map better to model
geometry because they tolerate higher distortion. Consequently, fewer elements are
required to mesh a model (Figure 5.22).
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 5 Finite Element Mesh 77

FIGURE 5.20 Large first order elements are unable to map to geometry. Fillets are
changed into chamfers and the round hole into a polygon. The inability of the first order
elements to map to curvilinear geometry combined with modeling constant stress makes the
first order elements practically useless.
© SAE International.

FIGURE 5.21 A second order solid element mesh is required to model this bracket; the
mesh is locally refined in the fillet area.
© SAE International.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

78 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 5.22 The same model meshed with over twelve thousand second order solid h
elements can be meshed with only 60 p elements. Fewer p elements are required because p
elements are designed to reach higher order during solution; no local mesh refinement is
required in p element mesh. p element mesh is shown with element shrinkage applied.

© SAE International.
h element mesh p element mesh

5.3.4. Incorrect Conversion to Shell Model


When representing thin wall models with shell element mesh, it is necessary to convert the
geometry into midplane surfaces suitable for meshing with shell elements. Even for simple
geometry, collapsing thin solids into midplane surfaces often produces unattached surfaces
and, consequently, unintentional gaps in shell element mesh. These gaps are easily visible
in a simple model (Figure 5.23) but may be missed if more complicated geometry is analyzed.
Conversion of solid geometry into surface geometry suitable for meshing with shell elements
may be difficult. Often it is easier to construct FEA-specific surface geometry from scratch.

FIGURE 5.23 Automated converting of thin solid geometry into surface geometry may
produce geometry with disconnected surfaces.

© SAE International.

Solid geometry Disjoined shell element mesh


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 5 Finite Element Mesh 79

5.4. Hands-On Exercises


5.4.1. BRACKET01
Description
The bracket is loaded with a pressure of 10 MPa applied to the blue face. Restraints are
applied to the back face (Figure 5.24).

Objective
Demonstrate the effect of global mesh refinement, h adaptive solution, and p adaptive
solution on stress results. Demonstrate the effect of defeaturing on the complexity of mesh.

Procedure
•• Apply the material properties (steel).
•• Apply the restraint to the back face.
•• Apply a pressure to the blue face.
•• Mesh and solve using second order tetrahedral solid elements mesh with coarse,
medium, and dense meshes.
•• Plot the maximum von Mises stress as a function of the number of DOFs in the
model or as a function of 1/h, where h is the element size.
•• Observe the change in the location of stress concentrations.
•• Repeat the exercise using h adaptive solution; mesh refinement process is not
necessary when h adaptive solution is used.

FIGURE 5.24 BRACKET01 model.


© SAE International.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

80 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

•• Repeat the exercise using p adaptive solution; mesh refinement process is not
necessary when p adaptive solution is used.
•• Repeat the exercise after removing small outside rounds which have no structural
significance; compare mesh complexity before and after removal of rounds. Do not
remove the large fillets because they are structurally important. The removal would
produce stress singularity.

5.4.2. CANTILEVER
Description
The cantilever beam has fixed restraints applied to the back face. It is loaded with 1000 N
force uniformly distributed to the blue face (Figure 5.25).

Objective
Demonstrate the effect of an incorrect mesh on displacement and stress results.

Procedure

•• Apply the material properties (steel).


•• Apply a load of 1000 N uniformly distributed over the blue face.
•• Apply restraints to the back vertical face.
•• Adjust the mesh density so that the beam is meshed with only one layer of elements;
use first order tetrahedral solid elements. This purposely creates an erroneous mesh.
•• Record the erroneous results of the maximum displacement and the maximum von
Mises stresses; compare with the analytical results.
•• Repeat the exercise with the second order elements; apply mesh bias on fillets.
•• Compare the results produced using the first order and second order elements.

FIGURE 5.25 CANTILEVER model.

© SAE International.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

6
Modeling Process

I
n any FEA project, most effort is spent creating the mathematical model which is the basis
for the finite element model. When the mathematical model is ready, it is discretized to
turn it into a finite element model.
We discuss issues related to the mathematical model after discussing mesh-related
issues. This order is reversed as compared to how these steps appear in an FEA project.
We do that because we are now better prepared to appreciate the differences between the
CAD model, the mathematical model, and the finite element model. We now realize that
most topics discussed in FEA training courses are not specific to the FEA. Instead, they
deal with the mechanics of materials and with techniques used for the creation of mathe-
matical models. Decisions on the type of analysis (linear or nonlinear?), the dimensionality
of analysis (2D or 3D?), idealization and defeaturing of CAD geometry, applying loads,
restraints, and so forth all belong to the process of creating a mathematical model and not
an finite element model. Still, in everyday FEA practice, the tasks of creating a mathematical
model and the task of creating a finite element model are tightly knitted together. This
justifies the emphasis on mathematical models and modeling techniques used in
their creation.
No matter how much time and effort we spend on modeling, a mathematical model
can never be accepted as a final and true description of the system. Rather, it can at best
be regarded as a good enough description of certain aspects of the system that are of
particular interest to us. Since the ultimate objective is to make a design decision, the
mathematical model should only be good enough to allow making that decision with

© 2023 SAE International 83


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

84 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

reasonable confidence. From this point of view, the best mathematical model is the simplest
one that still provides reliable results. We will review typical steps in creating a mathematical
model and offer tips helpful in creating models that provide the data of interest without
unnecessary complexity.

6.1. Modeling Steps


Most people start an FEA project by creating model geometry suitable for analysis. While
this approach is common and seems natural, it is not necessarily correct. There are lots of
things to do before working on the geometry.

6.1.1. Definition of the Objective of Analysis


This is, of course, the most fundamental issue. A model intended for modal analysis may
be different from one intended for stress analysis. We need to know what we wish to learn
from the results and then construct the simplest possible model that still provides correct
results. For example: do not use nonlinear material if a linear model will do; do not use
time dependent loading if static load can be used; do not use fully featured geometry if all
you are looking for are global displacements.

6.1.2. Selection of the Units of Measurement


We can use any consistent system of units in finite element project model, but in practice,
the choice of the system of units is dictated by the units used in the CAD model. However,
units in CAD are not always consistent; length can be expressed in millimeters [mm]
while mass density can be expressed in kilogram per cubic meter [kg/m3]. In FEA all
units must be consistent. Inconsistencies, which are easy to overlook, may lead to
serious errors.
In the International System of Units (SI) system, based on meter [m], kilogram mass
[kg], and second [s], all other units are easily derived from these three basic units. The
situation gets more complicated if we use a system based on derived units. In mechanical
engineering, length is commonly expressed in millimeters [mm], force in newton [N], and
time in seconds [s]. All other units must be derived from the basic units: millimeter, newton,
and second. Consequently, the unit of mass is a mass which, when subjected to the unit
force of 1 N, accelerates with the unit acceleration of 1 mm/s2 (Table 6.1). Therefore, the unit
of mass is equivalent to 1000 kg, or one metric tonne. Mass density is expressed in
[tonne/mm3]. This is critically important to remember when defining material properties
used in finite element model as well as when assigning mass properties to mass elements.
For example, a mass element of 5 kg must be assigned a mass of 0.005. Erroneous definition
of mass density in [kg/m3] rather than in [tonne/mm3]) results in mass density being one
trillion (1012) times higher. The same applies to other derived systems of units as shown in
Table 6.1. Most commercial FEA programs offer unit managers where data may be entered,
and results may be displayed in any unit.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 6 Modeling Process 85

TABLE 6.1 Mass density of aluminum in three systems of units.

SI
Unit of length m
Unit of mass kg
Unit of mass density kg/m3
Density of aluminum 2794 kg/m3
System derived from SI
Unit of length mm
Unit of mass tonne
Unit of mass density tonne/mm3
Density of aluminum 2.794 × 10−9 tonne/mm3
Imperial (IPS)
Unit of length in
Unit of mass slug/12
Unit of mass density slug/12/in3
Density of aluminum 2.614 × 10−4 slug/12/in3

6.1.3. G
 eometry Preparation
“Geometry preparation” means converting CAD-specific geometry into FEA-specific
geometry, the one that captures all important model features but avoids unnecessary
complexity and, at the same time, meshes correctly.
A common mistake is an attempt to use fully featured, manufacturing-ready CAD
geometry for analysis. Meshing complex CAD geometry is often impossible or the created
mesh is too large to solve or, if it is not too large, it does not have enough elements to capture
essential behavior or has excessively distorted elements. Even if you can create a correct
mesh based on a fully featured CAD geometry model, a very detailed representation of
geometry results in an expensive FE model with little, if any, benefits to results.
When preparing analysis-specific geometry, use Saint-Venant’s principle and concen-
trate modeling details in the regions of interest. Solid elements should not be necessarily
our first choice. Consider using shells, beams, or 2D representation.
The distinction between manufacturing specific CAD geometry and analysis specific
FEA geometry is one of the challenges facing design engineers. We will further discuss it
in Chapter 13.

6.1.4. Defining Material Properties


In most cases material properties can be found in the material library that comes with the
FEA program, but sometimes a custom material needs to be created. Some programs offer
a choice of assigning material properties either to the CAD model or FEA model. If your
FEA program offers that choice, it is convenient to assign material properties to the CAD
model, especially if this is an assembly consisting of many parts with different material
properties. This reduces material assignment errors.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

86 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

6.1.5. Defining Boundary Conditions


Defining boundary conditions includes the definition of loads and restraints. Restraints
are called essential boundary conditions and loads are called natural boundary conditions.
Volume loads like gravity or inertial loads do not belong to the class of boundary condi-
tions. Taking that into consideration, the popular term used in FEA literature: “loads and
boundary conditions,” should be rephrased to say “volume loads and boundary conditions.”
Regardless, in many software manuals the term “boundary conditions” is reserved for
restraints. Restraints themselves are referred to as constraints, supports, or fixtures. As a
side note, FEA terminology is often inconsistent between different commercial programs
leading to confusion and mistakes. Be sure to understand the meaning of all terms used in
your program.
Boundary conditions are assigned to geometric entities and then are transferred to
nodes. Defining loads is usually easier than defining restraints. Loads are vectors; they have
magnitude, direction, and sense. The definition of restraints is where severe errors are often
made. A common error is over-restraining the model. The correctness of restraints defini-
tion can be verified by examining reaction forces and comparing them with free body
diagrams which should always be prepared prior to analysis. Animation of displacement
plots helps review the model restraints.
The relative level of uncertainties in defining geometry, material, loads, and restraints
is qualitatively shown in Figure 6.1. The level of difficulty has no relation to the time required
to complete each step. Preparing analysis-specific geometry may take hours or days, while
applying restraints takes only a few mouse clicks.

FIGURE 6.1 Qualitative comparison of uncertainty in defining geometry, material


properties, loads, and restraints.

© SAE International.

Geometry Material property Loads Restraints


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 6 Modeling Process 87

6.2. S
 elected Modeling Techniques
6.2.1. M
 irror Symmetry and Anti-symmetry
Boundary Conditions
The bracket shown in Figure 6.2 is subjected to a load uniformly distributed over the cylin-
drical face; the load is pointing down. The back face is fixed.
The model is characterized by double mirror symmetry. Consider how the bracket will
deform when loaded. Due to the symmetry of geometry as well as the symmetry of loads
and supports about the blue plane, the imaginary cross-section along the plane of symmetry
remains flat in the deformed model. Therefore, the model may be simplified by cutting it
in half along the blue plane removing one-half of the model. Either the left or right half of
the model may be analyzed. One-half of the original load needs to be applied to the
remaining half of the model. Notice that the load needs to be cut in half only if it is defined
as a total load; load defined as force per area (pressure) remains the same. To make the
remaining half of the model behave as if the other half was still there, we must define mirror
symmetry boundary conditions for blue faces (Figure 6.3).
The boundary conditions are necessary to keep the faces flat and coincident with the
plane of symmetry while the model deforms. These conditions are mirror symmetry
boundary conditions, often simply called symmetry boundary conditions. Working with

FIGURE 6.2 A bracket has double symmetry. The symmetry about the blue plane will
be used to define mirror symmetry boundary conditions. The symmetry about the green
plane will be used to define anti-symmetry boundary conditions. The bracket is loaded with
load pointing down (perpendicular to the green plane) evenly distributed over the cylindrical
face. Load and restraints symbols are not shown.
© SAE International.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

88 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 6.3 To make half of the original geometry represent the whole model, mirror
symmetry boundary conditions must be applied to blue faces created by a cut along the
vertical plane. One-half of the total load is applied to this model. Either the right or left half of
the model may be analyzed.

© SAE International.
a model intended for meshing solid elements with 3 DOFs per node, the symmetry boundary
conditions need to be defined in terms of translations only. Translations in the direction
normal to the blue face are restrained, and translations in in-plane directions are permitted.
Working with a model intended for meshing with shell with 6 DOFs per node, the symmetry
boundary conditions must be also defined in terms of rotations. Rotations in the direction
normal to the plane of symmetry are permitted, and both in-plane rotations are eliminated.
The model shown in Figure 6.2 can be also simplified by taking advantage of the anti-
symmetry present in this problem (Figure 6.4).
The anti-symmetry boundary conditions apply when geometry and restraints are
symmetric about a plane (here the green horizontal plane) and loads are anti-symmetric
as shown in Figure 6.5. The anti-symmetry boundary conditions are exactly opposite to the
symmetry boundary conditions.
Tables 6.2 and 6.3 explain how mirror symmetry and anti-symmetry boundary condi-
tions are defined in each of the three principal planes in the orthogonal coordinate system.
The comparison shows that anti-symmetry boundary conditions can be seen as exactly
opposite to symmetry boundary conditions. Therefore, anti-symmetry boundary conditions
can be defined by reversing symmetry boundary conditions. Displacement components
allowed in symmetry boundary conditions are restrained in anti-symmetry boundary
conditions and the other way around.
Using both symmetry and anti-symmetry boundary conditions leads to further simpli-
fication because now only one-quarter of the bracket geometry needs to be modeled. Using
one-quarter of the bracket requires that one-quarter of the load be applied; this is because
the load is defined as a total load, not as load per unit of area. Different model simplifica-
tions are shown in Figure 6.6.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 6 Modeling Process 89

FIGURE 6.4 To make this half of the original geometry represent the whole model, the
anti-symmetry boundary conditions must be applied to the green face created by the
symmetry cut along the horizontal plane. One-half of the total load is applied to this model.
Either the top or bottom half of the model may be analyzed.
© SAE International.

FIGURE 6.5 The anti-symmetry boundary conditions require symmetry of geometry and anti-symmetry of loads.
This illustration shows the cross-section along the vertical plane of symmetry only to show the hole. The model intended
for analysis with anti-symmetry boundary conditions is obtained by cutting the original model along the plane of anti-
symmetry only, this is the horizontal plane. Two halves of the model shown on the right serve to visualize the anti-symmetry
of loads.

Horizontal plane of symmetry

Anti-symmetry boundary conditions


© SAE International.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

90 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

TABLE 6.2 Definition of symmetry boundary conditions in the three planes of an orthogonal
coordinate system.
Plane of symmetry xy yz xz
Translation x Free Restrained Free
Translation y Free Free Restrained
Translation z Restrained Free Free
Rotation x Restrained Free Restrained
Rotation y Restrained Restrained Free
Rotation z Free Restrained Restrained

TABLE 6.3 Definition of anti-symmetry boundary conditions in the three planes of an


orthogonal coordinate system.
Plane of anti-symmetry xy yz xz
Translation x Restrained Free Restrained
Translation y Restrained Restrained Free
Translation z Free Restrained Restrained
Rotation x Free Restrained Free
Rotation y Free Free Restrained
Rotation z Restrained Free Free

FIGURE 6.6 Faces with mirror symmetry boundary conditions are colored blue; faces
with anti-symmetry boundary conditions are colored green. Either one of the above four
models can be used for analysis.

Complete model One half with symmetry BC


© SAE International.

One half with anti-symmetry BC One quater with symmetry


and anti-symmetry BC
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 6 Modeling Process 91

FIGURE 6.7 The use of anti-symmetry boundary conditions allows to model one-half of
an automotive body subjected to torsion along the longitudinal axis. Anti-symmetry
boundary conditions are applied to edges in the plane of symmetry.
© SAE International.

FIGURE 6.8 Anti-symmetry boundary conditions are applied to a shaft subjected to torsion.
© SAE International.

Anti-symmetry
boundary conditions

Anti-symmetry boundary conditions are applicable to structures in bending;


they are also applicable to analyzing symmetric structures under torsion as shown
in Figures 6.7 and 6.8 .
Mirror symmetry boundary conditions are frequently used. On the other hand, anti-
symmetry boundary conditions are rarely used in FEA practice. Anti-symmetry boundary
conditions are difficult to conceptualize, and in case of problems with large displacements,
anti-symmetry boundary conditions must be defined as following the deforming structure,
and that option is not available in many FEA programs.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

92 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

6.2.2. Axial Symmetry


If geometry and boundary conditions (restraints, loads) have axial symmetry, then 2D axial
symmetry may be used. Unlike symmetry and anti-symmetry boundary conditions where
the user needs to define boundary conditions along the planes of symmetry, the axial
symmetry is included in the formulation of 2D elements used for 2D axisymmetric analysis.
Taking advantage of the axial symmetry, only one planar axial section needs to be meshed
and analyzed (Figure 6.9).

FIGURE 6.9 An axisymmetric tank, loaded with pressure distributed over a 360° angle
can be represented by a 2D radial section. The section is meshed with 2D axisymmetric
elements. The load applied to a 2D axisymmetric model is interpreted as a load applied over a
360° angle.

© SAE International.
6.2.3. Cyclic Symmetry
Cyclic symmetry is also called repetitive symmetry. Cyclic symmetry may be of angular
or linear type. Angular cyclic symmetry, often called circular symmetry, is applicable to
shapes which may be created by an angular pattern of one segment. The repeatability must
include not only geometry but also loads and restraints. Circular symmetry enforces the
same displacements on the corresponding faces shown in Figure 6.10.
A linear cyclic symmetry works with repeatable shapes that can be generated with
linear patterns; an example is shown in Figure 6.11.
Combinations of different forms of symmetry can also occur. For example, Figure 6.6
demonstrates the use of mirror symmetry and anti-symmetry in one model. The blower
model in Figure 6.10 could be further simplified by taking advantage of mirror symmetry
about the midplane in between the endplates.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 6 Modeling Process 93

FIGURE 6.10 An impeller exhibits circular symmetry. One section may be copied in a
circular pattern about the axis of the impeller to create the complete model. The impeller is
loaded with a centrifugal load. The load is also repetitive in each section. Faces “a” and “b” of
the section must experience the same displacements, and this is enforced by the circular
symmetry boundary conditions applied to one segment.

Face b2

Face a2

Face b1
© SAE International.

Face a1

FIGURE 6.11 A rack exhibits linear cyclic symmetry. One section may be copied in a linear
pattern to create the complete model. If loads and restraints are also linearly repetitive, then
faces “a” and “b” must experience the same displacements. This is enforced by the cyclic
symmetry boundary conditions applied to one segment.

Face b
© SAE International.

Face a
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

94 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

6.2.4. Realignment of Degrees of Freedom


An element node has a certain number of degrees of freedom (DOFs) depending on the
element type. Nodes of solid elements have typically three translational DOFs because
element deformation can be fully described with nodal translations only; there is no need
to introduce rotations. Nodes of 3D shell elements and 3D beam elements have 6 DOFs:
three translational and three rotational. Nodes of 2D elements have 2 DOFs.
By default, the directions of the DOFs are aligned with the global coordinate system of the
model. On certain occasions, it is convenient to realign those directions with other coordinate
systems, either for easier definition of boundary conditions or for easier interpretation of results.
The realignment of DOFs with a local cylindrical coordinate system is shown in
Figure 6.12 . This realignment models a hinge support.
The alignment of directions of DOFs with a local spherical coordinate system, shown
in Figure 6.13, models a spherical bearing support. Notice that this realignment is made
possible by modeling bearing with spherical faces which, of course, is different from real
bearing geometry.

FIGURE 6.12 DOFs of nodes on the face of the hole are aligned with directions of the
cylindrical coordinate system associated with the hole; these are radial, tangential, and axial
translations. Restraining radial translations (red arrows) simulate a pin support. Restraining axial
directions (yellow arrows) prevents the model from sliding along the axis of the hole. There are
no restraints in the circumferential direction allowing the tube to rotate about the axis.

© SAE International.
FIGURE 6.13 The shaft is supported by two spherical bearings that allow for some rotations
in the plane of bending. To model a spherical bearing support, the DOFs on the spherical faces
are aligned with respective directions of the spherical coordinate system: The support offered
by a spherical bearing is modeled by restraining translations in the radial direction (red arrows).
The spherical face of the left bearing is also restrained in circumferential direction (yellow
arrows) to prevent the shaft from spinning about the axis.
© SAE International.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 6 Modeling Process 95

6.2.5. U
 sing Point Restraints to Eliminate Rigid
Body Motions
Restraints applied to entities with zero area (point or line) can be used if those restraints
do not generate reactions and are used only to eliminate Rigid Body Motions (RBMs).
Otherwise, restraints applied to entities with zero area create displacements and
stress singularities.
Figure 6.14 illustrates eliminating RBMs in a 3D model subjected to internally balanced
loads. The restraints are necessary to eliminate RBMs.
Restraints 1, 2, and 3 in Figure 6.14 eliminate all RBMs, but do not serve to provide
reactions to the applied loads and, therefore do not interfere with model deformation.
Therefore, these restraints do not introduce displacement or stress singularities.

FIGURE 6.14 Opposite and equal tensile load (magenta arrows) is applied to both
vertical faces. Restraint 1 (red arrows) is applied in three orthogonal directions to one
corner. Restraint 1 eliminates translational RBMs but leaves the model with three
rotational RBMs. Restraint 2 (green arrows) eliminates rotation about the y and z axes
leaving the model with one rotational RBM. Restraint 3 (blue arrow) eliminates rotation
about the x axis.

Y
© SAE International.

Z X
1
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

96 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

6.3. Hands-On Exercises


6.3.1. BRACKET02—Mirror Symmetry BC
Description
The bracket is supported along the back side and loaded with 10000 N load uniformly
distributed as tractions to the red cylindrical face in the axial direction (Figure 6.15). A fixed
restraint is applied to the back face. Only one-half is modeled and the other half is simulated
with symmetry boundary conditions.

Objective
Demonstrate the use of mirror symmetry boundary conditions.

Procedure
•• If you use Parasolid geometry, cut the model in half as shown in Figure 6.15; if you use
SOLIDWORKS geometry, switch to configuration 02 half sym.
•• Apply the material properties (steel).
•• Apply a fixed restraint to the back face and apply mirror symmetry boundary
conditions to two faces located in the plane of the cut; these are blue faces shown
in Figure 6.15.
•• Apply half of the total load to half of the cylindrical face; refer to Figure 6.3 for load
direction.
•• Mesh and solve.
•• Analyze the displacement and stress results.

FIGURE 6.15 Complete BRACKET02 model and one-half of the model used with
symmetry boundary conditions.

© SAE International.

Complete model 1/2 model with symmetry BC


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 6 Modeling Process 97

6.3.2. BRACKET02—Anti-symmetry BC
Description
The bracket is supported along the back side and loaded with 10000 N bending load. Only
one-half is modeled and the other half is simulated with the anti-symmetry boundary
conditions (Figure 6.16). Displacements are small; therefore, non-following anti-symmetry
boundary conditions may be used.

Objective
Demonstrate the use of anti-symmetry boundary conditions.

Procedure
•• If you use Parasolid geometry, cut the model in half as shown in Figure 6.16; if you use
SOLIDWORKS geometry, switch to configuration 03 half anti sym.
•• Apply the material properties (steel).
•• Apply a fixed restraint to the back face and define anti-symmetry boundary
conditions (in-plane translations are eliminated, out-of-plane translations are
allowed).
•• Apply half of the total load to the cylindrical face.
•• Mesh and solve.
•• Analyze the animated displacement plots and stress plots; compare with
Exercise 6.3.1.

FIGURE 6.16 Complete BRACKET02 model and one-half of the model used with anti-
symmetry boundary conditions.
© SAE International.

Complete model 1/2 model with anti-symmetry BC


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

98 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

6.3.3. B
 RACKET02—Mirror Symmetry and
Anti-symmetry BC
Description
This exercise combines modeling techniques practiced in Exercises 6.3.1 and 6.3.2. If you use
Parasolid geometry, cut the model twice to quarter as shown in Figure 6.17; if you use
SOLIDWORKS geometry, switch to configuration 04 quarter. Displacements are small;
therefore, non-following anti-symmetry boundary conditions may be used.

Objective
Demonstrate the use of symmetry and anti-symmetry boundary conditions to model bending.

Procedure
•• Apply one-quarter of the total load to the cylindrical face.
•• Apply restraints: mirror symmetry and anti-symmetry boundary conditions.
•• Mesh and solve.
•• Compare the displacement and stress results produced in Exercises 6.3.1, 6.3.2,
and 6.3.3. Results will be slightly different because of different discretization errors
in each solution. Once convergence analysis is conducted, the results of all three
models will converge.

FIGURE 6.17 Complete BRACKET02 model and one-quarter of BRACKET02 model used
with mirror symmetry and anti-symmetry boundary conditions.

© SAE International.

Complete model 1/4 model with symmetry and anti-symmetry BC


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 6 Modeling Process 99

6.3.4. SHAFT01
Description
The shaft is supported at the back face and loaded with a couple of 1000 N forces applied
to two square holes. Only one-half of the shaft needs to be analyzed if anti-symmetry
boundary conditions are used. Load is applied to holes in the direction of arrows; it is
uniformly distributed over a flat face that forms a part of the hole. Displacements are small;
therefore, non-following anti-symmetry boundary conditions may be used.

Objective
Demonstrate the use of anti-symmetry boundary conditions to model torsion.

Procedure
•• If you use Parasolid geometry, cut the model in half as shown in Figure 6.18; if you use
SOLIDWORKS geometry, switch to configuration 02 half.
•• Apply the material properties (steel).
•• Apply a fixed restraint to the end face.
•• Apply anti-symmetry boundary conditions (in-plane translations are eliminated,
out-of-plane translations are allowed).
•• Apply a 1000 N load as shown in Figure 6.18.
•• Mesh and apply local mesh refinement to the fillet.
•• Solve.
•• Analyze the animated displacement plots and stress plots.
•• Repeat the analysis using full geometry; compare displacement and stress results.

FIGURE 6.18 Complete SHAFT01 model and one-half of SHAFT01 model used with anti-
symmetry boundary conditions.
© SAE International.

Complete model 1/2 model with anti-symmetry BC


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

100 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

6.3.5. PRESSURE TANK


Description
A pressure vessel is modeled as a surface geometry and needs to be meshed with shell
elements. The internal pressure is 1 MPa. Taking advantage of the mirror symmetry, one-half
of the model may be analyzed. Since shell elements are used, symmetry boundary condi-
tions must be defined in terms of all 6 DOFs: three translations and three rotations. 2D
axisymmetric representation cannot be used here because it would require a solid model,
which is represented by a radial slice. With a surface model a radial slice is reduced to a
line (Figure 6.19).

Objective
Demonstrate the use of symmetry boundary conditions when shell elements are used.

Procedure
•• If you use Parasolid geometry, cut the model in half to work with one-half of the
geometry; if you use SOLIDWORKS geometry, switch to configuration 02 half.
•• Define the material properties (steel).
•• Define the wall thickness (2 mm).
•• Define the fixed restraints to the flat bottom.
•• Define the symmetry boundary conditions along the edges in the plane of symmetry.
Translation in the direction normal to the plane of symmetry and two in-plane
rotations are restrained; consult Table 6.2.

FIGURE 6.19 PRESSURE TANK model.

© SAE International.

Complete model 1/2 model with symmetry BC


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 6 Modeling Process 101

•• Define the pressure load as 1 MPa; since this is a pressure and not the total load, the
pressure magnitude does not change when working with half of the model.
•• Mesh and solve.
•• Analyze the animated displacement plots and stress plots.
•• Repeat the analysis using the full model.
•• Compare the results of analyses of the half model and the complete model.

6.3.6. R
 ING
Description
An axisymmetric ring is subjected to 100 MPa pressure applied to the toroidal face (blue).
Sliding support is applied to the bottom face. Taking advantage of the axial symmetry, the
analysis may be conducted on the radial section shown in Figure 6.20.

Objective
Demonstrate the use of 2D axisymmetric analysis.

Procedure

•• Follow your program instructions to set up a 2D axisymmetric analysis.


•• Apply the material properties (steel).
•• Apply a sliding support to the bottom face represented as a line in the 2D model.
•• Apply a pressure of 100 MPa to the toroidal face represented as an arc in the 2D
model.
•• Mesh and solve.
•• Analyze the animated displacements and stresses.
•• Repeat the analysis using a 3D model. The sliding support applied to the bottom
will leave the model with three RBMs. To eliminate the RBMs define restraints in
the cylindrical coordinate system associated with the inner cylindrical face and
restrain circumferential displacements.

FIGURE 6.20 RING model.


© SAE International.

Complete model Radial slice


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

102 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

6.3.7. LINK01
Description
A pin-supported link is loaded with 100 N load uniformly distributed over the top face.
The left pin is fixed and the right one has a floating support shown in Figure 6.21 by rollers.
If contact stresses between the pins and holes are not of interest, then the analysis may
be conducted on the part, rather than on the assembly.
If a full model is analyzed, then restraints must be defined in the cylindrical coor-
dinate systems associated with respective holes. Taking advantage of the mirror
symmetry, the analysis may be conducted on one-half of the model with the mirror
symmetry boundary conditions defined and half of the load applied to the top face.
We assume that one of the hinge supports is “floating,” meaning that the distance between
hinges may change. This prevents the link form developing membrane stresses; analysis
of membrane stresses would require a nonlinear geometry analysis. This will be discussed
in Chapter 7.

Objective
Demonstrate the use of symmetry boundary conditions in a solid element model.
Demonstrate how realignment of the DOFs allows for modeling a hinge support.

FIGURE 6.21 LINK01 model.

100 N

Fixed hinge

50 N
Floating hinge
© SAE International.

Hinge support

Mirror symmetry boundary conditions


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 6 Modeling Process 103

Procedure

•• If you use Parasolid geometry, cut the model in half. If you use SOLIDWORKS
geometry, switch to configuration 02 half.
•• Apply the material properties: Nylon 6/10 (E = 8000 MPa, ν = 0.28). Align the DOFs
of the cylindrical faces with the respective cylindrical coordinate system. After
realignment the directions of translational DOFs are radial, circumferential, and
axial. There are no rotational DOFs because the model uses solid elements.
•• Restrain the radial and axial DOFs.
•• Apply the symmetry boundary conditions (restrain translations in the direction
normal to the face in the plane of symmetry).
•• Apply one-half load (50 N) to the top face as shown.
•• Mesh and solve.
•• Analyze the animated displacement plots and stress plots.
•• Repeat the analysis using the complete model and compare results.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

7
Nonlinear Geometry
Analysis

7.1. C
 lassification of Different Types of
Nonlinearities
Before we discuss different types of nonlinear analysis, we need to review some terms.
Structural analysis deals with deformable bodies; it finds displacements, strains, and
stresses. The opposite of a deformable body is a rigid body that does not deform under the
applied load. Rigid bodies are universally used in mechanism analysis but cannot be analyzed
using tools of structural analysis. Elastic bodies are deformable bodies that return to the
original shape when the load is removed. Linear structural analysis deals with elastic bodies
which stiffness does not change during the process of load application. Static analysis is a
structural analysis with slowly changing loads so that the inertial effect can be ignored. In
this chapter we discuss nonlinear static structural analysis with stiffness changing during
the process of load application.
Recall the fundamental FEA equation:

 K   d    F  (7.1)

where [K] is the stiffness matrix, [d] is the unknown vector of nodal displacements, and [F]
is the vector of nodal loads. Until now we have always assumed that the stiffness matrix
[K] is constant, meaning it is not a function of displacements. The only exception was the
introduction of elastic-perfectly plastic material with a strain-stress curve shown in
Figure 4.20. That material was used to discuss stress singularities.

© 2023 SAE International 105


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

106 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

The assumption that stiffness does not change during the process of load application
defines linear analysis. If stiffness does not change during the loading process, then stiffness
matrix [K] is calculated only once and no updates are necessary. If stiffness does change
during the loading process, then analysis becomes nonlinear, and it is necessary to update
the stiffness matrix [K] while loads are being applied. It is also necessary to introduce a
load time history that defines load as a function of time.
Nonlinear analysis may be classified based on the nature of nonlinear behavior. In this
chapter we will review nonlinearity caused by changes in model geometry and contact. In
Chapter 8 we will discuss nonlinear material and in Chapter 10 buckling.

7.2. Geometric Nonlinearity


Nonlinearity caused by changes in model geometry is called geometric nonlinearity.
Subcategories of geometric nonlinearity are large displacements and membrane
stress stiffening.
In nonlinear geometry analysis, displacements change the structure shape and, conse-
quently, structure stiffness. The stiffness matrix must then be updated during the process
of load application. The nonlinear geometry nonlinearity analysis is sometimes called “large
displacement” analysis, but this term is misleading because displacements do not need to
be large to change the structure stiffness.
We start with a problem where displacements are clearly large and cause a significant
change in model shape. Such a problem is a prismatic cantilever beam subjected to pressure
(Figure 7.1).
Pressure takes 1 sec to change from 0 to 0.03 MPa as shown in the load time-history
graph in Figure 7.2 . It is assumed that the load is increased slowly, and the inertial
effect ignored.
Time steps are, in this case, automatically selected by the solver. It is important to
remember that time on the ordinate is a pseudo time; it is used only to define the shape of
the load time-history curve and no inertial effects are considered, remember that analysis
is static. It could have been 10 sec or 0.1 sec just as well. Red markers indicate Steps 4, 7,
and 13. The corresponding pressure magnitude and beam displacements are shown in Figure
7.3. A 1:1 scale of deformation is used. A 1:1 scale of displacement is recommended for
presenting results of nonlinear geometry analysis as shown in Figure 7.3.
After each incremental increase of the pressure magnitude, the model stiffness is
updated. The load direction is also updated because, in this example, we assume that the
pressure follows the deforming beam, meaning that pressure remains normal to the
deforming face (Figure 7.4).

FIGURE 7.1 Cantilever beam subjected to pressure. The left end is fixed; the right end is
free to move. The model is shown in an undeformed shape.
© SAE International.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 7 Nonlinear Geometry Analysis 107

FIGURE 7.2 Time history of pressure applied to the cantilever beam in Figure 7.1.

0.030

0.025

0.020
Pressure [MPa]

0.015

0.010

0.005
© SAE International.

0.000
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
Time [s]

FIGURE 7.3 Progressive deformation of the cantilever beam subjected to pressure.


Pressure remains normal to the top face while the model deforms. The pressure magnitude
increases from 0 to 0.03 MPa in 13 automatically selected increments. Steps 4, 7, and 13 are
marked with red dots in Figure 7.2.

Step 4
0.0045 MPa

Step 7
0.0135 MPa

Step 13
0.03 MPa
© SAE International.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

108 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 7.4 The following load keeps its orientation relative to the model. Here, the
pressure load remains normal to the top face. The following load is also called non-
conservative load because it does not retain its original direction.

© SAE International.
x

Another possibility is a non-following load that retains its original direction relative
to the global coordinate system (Figure 7.5). The non-following load could be produced by
its own weight.
A load retaining its direction relative to the deforming model is called a non-conser-
vative load or following load. A load retaining its direction relative to the global coordinate
system is called conservative or non-following load.

FIGURE 7.5 Non-following load retains its original orientation relative to the global
coordinate system. Non-following load is also called conservative load because it retains its
original direction relative to the global coordinate system.

y
© SAE International.

x
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 7 Nonlinear Geometry Analysis 109

FIGURE 7.6 Model deformation found in linear analysis. The deformed model shows
apparent stretching. These results are incorrect.

Step 4
0.0045 MPa

Step 7
0.0135 MPa

Step 13
0.03 MPa
© SAE International.

It is interesting to compare the pattern of deformation of the cantilever beam in linear


and nonlinear analyses. In linear analysis (Figure 7.6), the end of the beam travels along a
straight line. This is acceptable if displacements remain small. An apparent rotation of the
beam end face is caused by the elongation of top layers due to tensile stress and shrinkage
of the bottom layers due to compressive stress. The midpoint on the free end of the beam
still travels along the straight dashed line shown in Figure 7.6. Compare this incorrect
pattern of deformation produced by linear analysis to the results of nonlinear geometry
analysis in Figure 7.3.
For another comparison between the results of linear analysis and nonlinear geometry
analysis, consider a round shaft loaded with a couple of forces (Figure 7.7).
An apparent stretch of the lug and a growth in shaft diameter can be observed in the
results of linear analysis, as shown in Figure 7.8. This is clearly incorrect and indicates that
the limits of linear geometry analysis have been exceeded.
In linear analysis, each point on the shaft surface travels along the circumferential
direction, normal to the radius, and this produces “swelling” of the shaft as explained in
Figure 7.9.
Considering the magnitude of displacements, the shaft problem requires a nonlinear
geometry analysis. The results of the nonlinear analysis are shown in Figure 7.10.
A similar misapplication of linear analysis is shown in Figure 7.11.
When using the true scale of deformation, you see the model “stretching” (beam in
bending) or “swelling” (shaft in torsion). Go back to the problem definition and specify a
nonlinear geometry, large displacement analysis.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

110 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 7.7 A round shaft loaded with a couple of forces. The forces retain their direction
relative to the deforming model. The far end of the shaft is fixed.

© SAE International.
FIGURE 7.8 Displacement plots produced by linear analysis. The holes travel along
straight lines and the shaft “swells” seemingly increasing its diameter. This is because, in
linear analysis, the model shape is not updated and displacements are superimposed on the
undeformed model. There is no intermediate shape between the undeformed model and the
deformed model.

© SAE International.

Front view Rear oblique view


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 7 Nonlinear Geometry Analysis 111

FIGURE 7.9 The green circle is the diameter of the unloaded shaft. The red circle is the
diameter of the shaft loaded with a torque. Since the analysis is linear, trajectories of points
traveling from the undeformed to the deformed position are straight lines; point A displaces
along a straight line to position A′. This, when repeated for all points on the circumference of
the green circle, produces an apparent increase in the shaft diameter.

A A′

D′

D
B

B′
© SAE International.

C′ C

FIGURE 7.10 Displacement results of nonlinear geometry analysis. The holes travel along
an arc as they should, and the shaft diameter does not increase.
© SAE International.

Front view Rear oblique view


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

112 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 7.11 Model of a shaft under torsion before and after deformation using the true
scale of deformation. The linear analysis produces an incorrect “swollen” shape. The
nonlinear, large displacement analysis produces the correct shape.

© SAE International.
Undeformed model Results of linear analysis Results of nonlinear analysis

7.3. M
 embrane Stress Stiffening
Beam in bending and shaft in torsion problems required nonlinear geometry analysis
because large displacements were changing stiffness significantly. However, there are
problems where nonlinear geometry analysis is required, even though displacements are
small relative to the model size. An example is a thin flat plate under pressure (Figure 7.12).
Initially, when the load is applied to the flat plate, the only mechanism available to resist
the load is bending stiffness. During the process of deformation, the plate acquires membrane
stiffness in addition to the original bending stiffness (Figure 7.13).
Neglecting nonlinear effects in the Round Plate model causes a 55% error in displace-
ment results. This high error occurs even though displacements are small. The maximum
plate displacement is 5 mm when accounting for the membrane stiffness effect and 7.7 mm
when linear analysis is used, and membrane effects are erroneously ignored (Figure 7.14).

FIGURE 7.12 A thin flat plate with a diameter of 500 mm and thickness of 5 mm is rigidly
supported along the circumference. It is subjected to pressure slowly changing from 0 to
0.3 MPa. The plate material is Alloy Steel.

© SAE International.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 7 Nonlinear Geometry Analysis 113

FIGURE 7.13 The flat plate has a bending stiffness only, and it responds to pressure with
bending stresses. The deformed plate responds to pressure with bending stresses and tensile
(membrane) stresses; it has bending and membrane stiffness.

Bending stresses

A
© SAE International.

Bending and membrane stresses

FIGURE 7.14 Displacement results of linear and nonlinear analyses. Using the true scale of
deformation, deformation is barely recognizable. Neither displacement of 7.7 mm nor 5.0 mm
are “large displacement;” still the problem requires nonlinear geometry analysis.

7.7 5.0
7.0 4.5
6.4 4.1
5.7 3.7
5.1 3.3
4.5 2.9
3.8 2.5
3.2 2.1
2.6 1.7
© SAE International.

1.9 1.2
1.3 0.8
0.6 0.4
0.0 0.0
Linear solution, max. displacement 7.7 mm Nonlinear solution, max. displacement 5.0 mm

The comparison between load-displacement curves produced by linear and nonlinear


solutions is shown in Figure 7.15. The curved load-displacement graph clearly demonstrates
that stiffness is increasing during the process of load application. The round plate problem
illustrates that linear analysis is unable to membrane stiffness that does not exist prior
to load application.
Results of a linear analysis can be freely scaled to correspond to different load magni-
tudes. In nonlinear analysis, any change of load requires a new solution.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

114 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 7.15 Load-displacement curve in the linear solution is a straight line. Plate
stiffness is calculated for the original, flat shape. The stiffness is not updated, and the load is
applied in one step. The load-displacement curve in the nonlinear solution is a curve built on
13 points. The solution was completed in 13 load increments; stiffness was updated 13 times.
The shape of the load-displacement curve demonstrates that plate stiffness increases while
it deforms.

8.00 Linear solution


max. displ. 7.7 mm

Max. displacement [mm] 6.00


Nonlinear solution
max. displ. 5.0 mm
4.00

2.00

© SAE International.
0.00
0 0.1 0.2 0.3
Pressure [MPa]

Consider a link supported by two hinges in Figure 7.16. When a linear analysis is used,
it is assumed that one of the hinges is floating as if it was supported by rollers; only bending
is present. But if both hinges are in the fixed position, then the load produces both bending
and elongation, and linear analysis cannot model that. A linear analysis is based on the
stiffness of the undeformed link. That stiffness is based on bending stresses only; membrane
stiffness produced by tensile stresses is not accounted for (Figure 7.13). Linear analysis cannot
distinguish between fixed and floating supports (Figure 7.16). When analyzed with linear
analysis, both configurations shown in Figure 7.16 produce the same displacements in the
direction of load and the floating hinge does not move at all. The analysis of configuration
with both hinges fixed requires nonlinear geometry analysis even if displacements are small.
Configuration with one floating hinge may be solved with linear analysis if displace-
ments are small and horizontal displacement of the floating hinge is not of interest. However,
if the horizontal displacement of the floating hinge is of interest, then nonlinear geometry
analysis is required. This is because the hinge translation is caused by the model deforma-
tion that happens during the process of load application.
Both linear and nonlinear analyses of the assembly shown in Figure 7.16 may be simpli-
fied to the analysis of one part, as shown in Figure 7.17.
Consider the beam shown in Figure 7.18. The wide end is held in a fixed position; the
narrow end (shown in blue) can slide in the horizontal direction. A pressure is applied to
the top face. We are looking for displacement in the direction of load and for horizontal
displacement of the sliding end. Let us review the results of linear and nonlinear
geometry analyses.
Displacement plots in the true scale of deformations found in linear and nonlinear
analyses are shown in Figure 7.19.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 7 Nonlinear Geometry Analysis 115

FIGURE 7.16 Configuration with a floating hinge (top) may be analyzed with linear
analysis if displacements are small and the horizontal translation of the floating hinge is not of
interest. If the horizontal translation of the floating hinge is of interest, then nonlinear
geometry analysis is required. Analysis of configuration with both hinges in fixed position
always requires nonlinear geometry analysis.

Floating hinge

Fixed hinge

Fixed hinge
© SAE International.

Fixed hinge

FIGURE 7.17 Hinge supports are applied to red cylindrical faces. If the link is analyzed
with linear analysis, then the results are valid for configuration with one floating hinge. If it is
analyzed with a nonlinear geometry analysis, then the results are valid for configurations with
both hinges in fixed positions.

Hinge support
© SAE International.

Hinge support
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

116 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 7.18 A thin beam under pressure has one end fixed; the other end may slide in
the horizontal direction.

© SAE International.
FIGURE 7.19 Linear displacement analysis (top) and nonlinear geometry analysis
(bottom) both produce almost the same resultant displacement.

2.86 2.85
2.62 2.61
2.38 2.38
2.14 2.14
1.90 1.90
1.67 Deformed model in linear analysis 1.66
1.43 1.43
1.19 1.19
0.95 0.95
0.71 0.71
0.48 Deformed model in nonlinear geometry analysis 0.48
0.24

© SAE International.
0.24
0.00 0.00
Displacements Displacements
in linear analysis in nonlinear
geometry analysis

The maximum displacement that takes place in the direction of the load is practically
the same in both analyses. If the maximum displacement is all we are interested in, then
the linear analysis suffices.
Figure 7.20 shows displacement plots on a 10:1 scale. The exaggerated scale of deforma-
tion reveals that, in the linear analysis, the sliding end does not slide at all. In the nonlinear
geometry analysis, the sliding is modeled. Therefore, if displacements of the sliding end are
of interest, the problem requires nonlinear geometry analysis.
It is difficult to establish a “rule of thumb” that would say when it is OK to run a linear
analysis and when a nonlinear geometry analysis is required. The magnitude of displace-
ment does not differentiate between linear geometry and nonlinear geometry analysis. The
differentiating factor is whether displacements cause a significant change in stiffness.
In summary, we need to differentiate between the terms “Large displacement analysis”
and “Nonlinear geometry analysis.” These two terms are often confused because, in some
commercial FEA programs, the nonlinear geometry analysis is called “Large displacement
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 7 Nonlinear Geometry Analysis 117

FIGURE 7.20 Undeformed beam (top), deformed shape in linear analysis (middle), and
deformed shape in nonlinear analysis (bottom). The linear analysis does not show any
displacements of the sliding end. The nonlinear analysis does show displacement of the
sliding end. The scale of deformation is 10:1.

Undeformed model

Deformed shape
in linear analysis

Sliding end
does not move

Deformed shape in nonlinear


© SAE International.

geometry analysis
Sliding end moves

analysis.” Large displacement analysis is a subcategory of nonlinear geometry analysis and


applies to cases where stiffness changes because displacements are large. However, displace-
ments do not have to be large to cause a significant change of stiffness, as has been illustrated
by membrane stress stiffening.

7.4. Contact
Analysis of contact is another type of nonlinear geometry analysis. The source of nonlinear
behavior may be closing the gap or a change in the size of the contact area during the process
of load application. Even though displacements may be very small in comparison to the
overall model size, the change of stiffness is significant and, therefore, requires a
nonlinear analysis.
Analysis of contact between two or more bodies may be conducted to find contact
stresses. Proper meshing is a very important modeling consideration in contact stress
analysis, but often it is difficult to construct a correct mesh. For correct results of contact
stress analysis, elements in and around the contact zone must be sized accordingly to the
expected size of the contact area. However, automatic meshing selects the size of the mesh
based on the model geometry and not based on the size of the contact area that is unknown
prior to the analysis. Automatically generated mesh is rarely adequate for analysis of the
contact stresses. Mesh controls must be used to make elements small enough to model
contact stress. We will illustrate this with an example of an analysis of contact stresses
between two cylindrical faces of a clamp shown in Figure 7.21. Initially, there is a small gap
between the two faces; it closes under the applied load.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

118 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 7.21 Load applied to the top face closes the gap between two cylindrical faces.
The bottom face of the clamp is fixed.

© SAE International.
FIGURE 7.22 Mesh with elements this large cannot be used to model contact stresses.
With elements this large, contact is modeled as a line contact between two rows of nodes.

© SAE International.

A mesh with the default element size does not come even close to the correct modeling
of contact stress. As shown in Figure 7.22, contact is modeled as a line with several nodes
along its length.
A very fine mesh is required to model contact stresses correctly. We demonstrate it
using a 2D plane strain representation (Figure 7.23).
The 2D mesh is shown in Figure 7.24 and stress results are shown in Figure 7.25.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 7 Nonlinear Geometry Analysis 119

FIGURE 7.23 A 2D slice in the plane of symmetry of the model will be meshed with 2D
plane strain elements. 2D representations make it practical to use small elements in the
contact area.
© SAE International.

FIGURE 7.24 A 2D mesh showing very small elements in the contact area.
© SAE International.

The model in Figure 7.21 has a very small gap and the upper arm does not have to move
a lot to close the gap. Therefore, a large displacement analysis is not required. However, the
model in Figure 7.26 does require a large displacement analysis or else the gap closes incor-
rectly (Figure 7.27).
Another category of contact problem is shown in Figure 7.28: an oversized ring with a
gap is assembled into a cylinder. The ring must shrink to fit into the cylinder.
Figure 7.29 shows the model geometry before and after solution. The initial interference
between the assembly components is eliminated. Inserting the ring into the cylinder expands
the cylinder and shrinks the ring.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

120 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 7.25 Von Mises stress results produced by the 2D plane strain model. Correct
modeling of contact stresses in a very small region of the model requires very small elements
as shown in Figure 7.24

© SAE International.
FIGURE 7.26 CLAMP02 loaded with pressure 0.03MPa

© SAE International.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 7 Nonlinear Geometry Analysis 121

FIGURE 7.27 Incorrect results of linear analysis and correct results of nonlinear analysis.
Undeformed shapes are superimposed on the deformed plots. To model the closing of a gap
this large requires a large displacement analysis. This problem combines two types of
nonlinearities: large displacements and contact.
© SAE International.

Incorrect gap closure in linear analysis Correct gap closure in nonlinear analysis

FIGURE 7.28 An oversized ring with a gap is installed in a cylinder. The shrinkage
develops contact stresses between the touching faces of the ring and the cylinder.
© SAE International.

Ring with gap Cylinder


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

122 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 7.29 Model before and after solution. The original interference between the ring
and the cylinder has been eliminated in the deformed shape.

© SAE International.
Before solution After solution

FIGURE 7.30 Contact pressure plot on the faces of the ring and the cylinder. The
assembly is shown in two different exploded views to show the faces in contact.

© SAE International.
The ring is held in a deformed shape by the contact pressure between the contacting
faces (Figure 7.30).

7.5. Hands-On Exercises


Chapter 7 deals with nonlinear geometry but not with a nonlinear material. In some exer-
cises you will see stresses well above the yield, but no yielding will be modeled because all
exercises use a linear material model.

7.5.1. CANTILEVER BEAM


Description
A cantilever beam is subjected to a uniform pressure over the top face. Fixed restraint is
applied to one end (Figure 7.1).
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 7 Nonlinear Geometry Analysis 123

Objective
Demonstrate the differences between an incorrect linear solution and two correct nonlinear
geometry solutions: with the following load and with the non-following load.

Procedure

•• Assign the material properties: Nylon 6/10 (E = 8300 MPa, ν = 0.28).


•• Apply fixed restraint to one end face.
•• Apply a pressure of 0.03 MPa to the top face.
•• Mesh with second order solid elements, at least two elements across the beam
thickness.
•• Find the linear solution.
•• Find the nonlinear geometry (large displacement) solution with the following load.
•• Find the nonlinear large displacement solution with the non-following load.
•• Compare displacements and stress results from the above solutions.

7.5.2. SHAFT02
Description
A long round shaft is subjected to a torque load produced by a couple of forces acting on
two square holes in the lug (Figure 7.7). Flat faces in the square holes make it easy to apply
the following load. Examine the CAD model and notice that the shaft is longer than what
is shown Figure 7.7. Long shaft has low stiffness in torsion resulting in large displacements.
Objective
Demonstrate differences between an incorrect linear solution and the correct nonlinear
geometry solution with the following load.

Procedure
•• Assign the material properties: Steel.
•• Apply restraints: fixed to the end of the shaft.
•• Apply a load of 3500 N to each square hole as shown in Figure 7.7.
•• Mesh with second order solid elements, at least four elements across the shaft
diameter; use mesh control on the fillet at the back side of the lug to control the
element turn angle.
•• Find the linear solution.
•• Find the nonlinear large displacement solution with the following load.
•• Compare displacements and stress results from the above two solutions.

7.5.3. ROUND PLATE01


Description
A thin, round plate is restrained along the perimeter and subjected to a uniformly distrib-
uted pressure (Figure 7.12). We need to find the maximum displacement. This problem can
be solved in several ways:
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

124 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

•• No changes to the model geometry, meshed with solid elements.


•• Angular section of the plate meshed with solid elements with displacement boundary
conditions along the flat faces created by the cuts.
•• Either the top or the bottom round face meshed with shell elements (the complete
circle or an angular section).
•• 2D axisymmetric model.
Objective
Demonstrate the nonlinear effects of membrane stress stiffening.

Procedure
The following assumes that the complete model is analyzed with solid elements.
•• Assign the material properties: Steel.
•• Apply fixed restraints to the cylindrical face along the perimeter.
•• Apply a load of 0.5 MPa to the top face.
•• Mesh with the second order solid elements, at least one layer of correctly shaped
elements across the plate thickness.
•• Find a linear solution.
•• Find a nonlinear large displacement solution with the following load.
•• Compare displacements and stress results from the linear and the nonlinear
solutions.

7.5.4. LINK02
Description
A link is supported by two hinges in the fixed positions as shown in Figure 7.16, bottom. A
uniformly distributed pressure is applied to the top face. We are looking for displacements
and stresses in the link, but not for contact stresses at hinge supports (Figure 7.17). This
problem could be analyzed using one-half of the link with symmetry boundary conditions.

Objective
Demonstrate that the linear analysis does not model tensile stresses developing during the
process of load application. As a result, a linear analysis produces incorrect displacement
and stress results.

Procedure

•• Assign the material properties: ABS plastic (E = 2000 MPa, μ = 0.394).


•• Apply restraints: fixed hinge support to cylindrical holes on both sides.
•• Apply a load of 0.015 MPa uniformly distributed over the top face.
•• Mesh with second order solid elements; four layers across the link height.
•• Find the linear solution.
•• Find the nonlinear large displacement solution with following load.
•• Compare displacements and stress results from the above solutions.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 7 Nonlinear Geometry Analysis 125

7.5.5. SLIDING SUPPORT


Description
The thick end is fixed, and the thin end can slide in horizontal directions. The top face is
subjected to a uniformly distributed pressure (Figure 7.18). We are looking for the horizontal
displacement of the sliding end.

Objective
Demonstrate that a linear analysis does not model displacement of the sliding end. You will
see that the results of the linear analysis are the same for the sliding end and the fixed end.
A 2D plane stress or 2D plane strain representation could be used to demonstrate that the
sliding end does not slide in the linear analysis.

Procedure
•• Assign the material properties: Steel.
•• Apply restraints: fixed support to the thick end; sliding support to the thin end.
•• Apply a load of 0.1 MPa uniformly distributed pressure to the top face.
•• Mesh with the second order solid elements, one layer of correctly shaped elements
across the beam thickness.
•• Find the linear displacement solution; notice that the sliding end does not move.
•• Find the nonlinear large displacement solution with the following load and observe
the translation of the sliding end.

7.5.6. C
 LAMP01
Description
A load applied to the top arm closes the gap between two cylindrical faces (Figure 7.21).
We are looking for contact stresses that develop when the gap closes. A 2D plane strain
model is used because it offers a significant reduction in the time required for meshing
and solving. There is no need for a large displacement solution. This problem can
be solved using sufficiently small solid elements if long meshing and solution times
are acceptable.

Objective
Analyze the gap closure and contact stresses. The importance of using small elements in
the contact area.

Procedure

•• Assign the material properties: Steel.


•• Use a 2D plane strain simplification.
•• Apply restraints: fixed support to the face at the tip of the lower arm.
•• Apply a 75 MPa uniformly distributed pressure as shown in Figure 7.21.
•• Define No Penetration contact between two cylindrical faces, represented as lines
in the 2D model.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

126 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

•• Define the mesh control along two edges that will come in contact: use element
size of 0.05 mm.
•• Mesh with 2D plane strain elements.
•• Find the nonlinear displacement solution and analyze contact stresses.

7.5.7. CLAMP02
Description
A plastic clamp is closed by pressure applied to the top arm and fixed restraint is applied
to the corresponding bottom face (Figure 7.26). Gap closing is demonstrated with 2D plane
strain analysis. High stresses develop in the arch, not in the contact area.

Objective
Demonstrate the problem that combines two types of nonlinearities: large displacements
and contact. Demonstrate incorrect gap closing in linear analysis.

Procedure

•• Assign the material properties: Nylon 6/10 (E = 8000 MPa, ν = 0.28).


•• Apply restraints: fixed support to the bottom face.
•• Apply a load of 0.03 MPa pressure (Figure 7.27).
•• Define No Penetration contact between the two cylindrical faces.
•• Apply mesh bias to the faces expected to come in contact.
•• Mesh with 2D plane strain elements.
•• Find the linear solution and the nonlinear solution; compare deformed shapes in
the true scale of deformation.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

8
Nonlinear Material
Analysis

8.1. R
 eview of Nonlinear Material Models
A linear material model is defined by the modulus of elasticity and Poisson’s ratio. The
linear relationship between strain and stress demonstrates that the modulus of elasticity
does not change with strain (Figure 8.1).
A nonlinear material model is one that does not follow the linear relationship between
strain and stress and, therefore, its modulus of elasticity changes with strain. Using such
material, model stiffness changes during the loading process and the stiffness matrix must
be recalculated during the iterative solution.
A simple nonlinear material model is the elastic-perfectly plastic material. It
assumes a linear relationship between strain and stress up to a certain level of stress
called yield strength. Once the yield strength is reached the stress remains constant
regardless of the strain. As compared to the linear material model, the only additional
piece of information required is the yield strength, usually defined using von Mises
stress. There are many other material models such as nonlinear material with soft-
ening (Figure 8.2), bilinear material with hardening ( Figure 8.2), and many more.
We limit the review of nonlinear material models to the elastic-perfectly plastic
material model.
A bracket made from aluminum with a yield strength of 27.6 MPa is shown in Figure 8.3.
A linear analysis is run first; a plot of von Mises stresses is shown in Figure 8.4. Large
portions of the model show stress above the yield strength.
The next analysis uses the elastic-perfectly plastic material model and provides results
shown in Figures 8.5 and 8.6.

© 2023 SAE International 129


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

130 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 8.1 Stress-strain curve of a linear material model.


E= = tan 
 

© SAE International.


FIGURE 8.2 Strain-stress curves of selected nonlinear material models.

s s s

© SAE International.
e e e
(a) Elastic-perfectly plastic (b) Nonlinear with softening (c) Bi-linear with hardening

FIGURE 8.3 A bracket loaded with a load uniformly distributed to the blue face and
supported at the back face.

© SAE International.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 8 Nonlinear Material Analysis 131

FIGURE 8.4 Von Mises stress plot produced with a linear material model. The red arrow
on the color legend indicates the yield strength of the material. Large portions of the model
show stress magnitude above the yield strength of 27.6 MPa.

41.3
.

37.8

34.4

31.0

27.5

24.1

20.6

17.2

13.8

10.3

6.9
© SAE International.

3.4

0.0
Yield strength: 27.6

FIGURE 8.5 Von Mises stress plot produced using the elastic-perfectly plastic material
model. The maximum von Mises stress is 27.6 MPa, which corresponds to the flat portion of
the strain-stress curve in the material model.

27.6

25.3

23.0

20.7

18.4

16.1

13.8

11.5

9.2

6.9
© SAE International.

4.6

2.3

0.0
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

132 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 8.6 Section clipping applied to the plot in Figure 8.5 shows that almost the entire
cross-section of the cantilever portion of the bracket has reached its yield stress. The bracket
is very close to collapse.

27.6

25.3

23.0

20.7

18.4

16.1

13.8

11.5

9.2

6.9

© SAE International.
4.6

2.3

0.0

The results based on the elastic-perfectly plastic material model show the maximum
stress equal to the yield strength of the material. Plasticized material now occupies almost
the entire cross-section of the cantilever portion of the bracket. Based on this finding
we conclude that the applied load is very close to the maximum load that the bracket can
take. A further increase in the load magnitude will cause plastic bending of the cantilever
portion of the bracket. This applies only to analysis with elastic-perfectly plastic material.
When a linear material model is used, an increase in the load magnitude produces larger
displacements, larger strain, and larger stress, all with no bounds.

8.2. U
 se of Nonlinear Material to Control
Stress Singularity
The use of elastic-perfectly plastic material can eliminate stress singularities like those
accompanying sharp reentrant edges. Using elastic-perfectly plastic material places the
upper bound on the stress level; the highest stress equals the yield strength as defined in
the material model. It is important to point out that while the stress magnitude is capped
at the yield strength of the model material, strain diverges with mesh refinement.
Consider a bracket shown in Figure 8.7. If it is analyzed with a linear material model,
the maximum stress diverges with mesh refinement because of stress singularity caused
by the sharp reentrant edge. Stress results in Figure 8.8 show the maximum von Mises stress
of 556 MPa. This maximum stress coincides with the stress singularity and, therefore,
is meaningless.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 8 Nonlinear Material Analysis 133

FIGURE 8.7 A bracket loaded with a uniformly distributed pressure and support applied
to the back face. A sharp reentrant edge is a part of the model geometry.

Fixed support
to back face

Sharp re-entrant edge


Pressure 16 MPa
© SAE International.

FIGURE 8.8 Von Mises stress plot produced using a linear material model. Stress results
along the sharp reentrant edge are meaningless because of the stress singularity.

556.2

509.9

463.5

417.2

370.8

324.5

278.1

231.8

185.4

139.1

92.7
© SAE International.

46.4

0.0
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

134 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 8.9 Section plots of von Mises stress results produced by the linear analysis and
the nonlinear analysis with elastic-perfectly plastic material. The same stress legend applies
to both plots. In the linear analysis, the upper range of the color legend is truncated at 206.8
MPa, and everything above that number shows as red. In the nonlinear analysis, there are no
locations where stress would be higher than 206.8 MPa.

206.8
206.8
189.6
189.6
172.3
172.3
155.1
155.1
137.9
137.9
120.6
120.6
103.4
103.4
86.2
86.2
68.9
68.9
51.7
51.7
34.5

© SAE International.
34.5
17.2
17.2
0.0
0.0

Linear material model Elastic-perfectly plastic material model

“Hiding” stress singularity by truncating the stress magnitude at the yield strength
leads to erroneous results, as shown in Figure 8.9 (left). The same model analyzed using the
elastic-perfectly plastic material does not show stress singularities. Mesh refinement does
not produce divergent stresses because the maximum stress is capped at 206.8 MPa, which
is the yield strength of the elastic-perfectly material as shown in Figure 8.9 (right).
Differences between incorrect results of the linear analysis and the correct results of
the nonlinear analysis with the elastic-perfectly plastic material (Figure 8.9) demonstrate
that stress singularities cannot be “hidden” by truncating the upper range of the color
legend. Also, the extent of yielding cannot be modeled by truncating the maximum stress
magnitude. A nonlinear material model is required for correct modeling of yielding.

8.3. O
 ther Types of Nonlinearities
Geometric nonlinearities were discussed in Chapter 7, and material nonlinearities are
discussed in this chapter. Another important type of nonlinearity, nonlinear buckling, is
presented in Chapter 10.
For a better understanding of nonlinear buckling analysis, we need to review the modal
analysis presented in Chapter 9.

8.4. Hands-On Exercises


8.4.1. BRACKET NL
Description A bracket is loaded with a uniformly distributed load (5000 N) applied to the
blue face (Figure 8.3). This load will cause partial yielding. Once the first analysis is completed,
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 8 Nonlinear Material Analysis 135

double the load (10000 N) and run it again. In both analyses the load will be applied in
increments as is always the case with nonlinear analysis. However, in the second analysis,
the load will not reach the magnitude of 10000 N because the solver will crash. The last
successfully performed step corresponds to the load that does not yet cause complete plas-
tification of the cantilever portion of the model. The next load increment completes the
plastification of the cross-section causing a plastic hinge which, in turn, causes the solution
to crash.

Objective
Conduct analysis with the elastic-perfectly plastic material model; study the structural
collapse caused by material yielding.

Procedure

•• Assign the material properties: elastic-perfectly plastic material, Aluminum Alloy


with a yield strength of 27.6 MPa.
•• Apply the fixed restraints to the back face.
•• Apply a load of 5000 N to the blue face.
•• Mesh with the second order solid elements; adjust the global element size to have
four to five elements covering the fillets. The turn angle should be 20° or less.
•• Find the linear solution.
•• Find the nonlinear solution with elastic-perfectly plastic material; a small
displacement assumption may be used.
•• Compare displacements and stress results from the linear and nonlinear solutions.
•• Double the load magnitude and run a nonlinear material analysis again. Observe
the solver produce an error message.

8.4.2. L BRACKET02
Description
A bracket with stress singularity caused by the sharp reentrant edge is loaded in bending
(Figure 8.7). Very different stress results are produced using linear and nonlinear materials.
Having completed this exercise, eliminate the stress singularity by adding a fillet. Next,
run the analysis with elastic-perfectly plastic material in the model with fillet and compare
results to those produced using the model with a sharp reentrant edge.

Objective
Demonstrate the use of elastic-perfectly plastic material in a model with stress singularity.
Demonstrate differences between the results of linear analysis and nonlinear analysis used
to study the extent of yielding.

Procedure

•• Assign the material properties: elastic-perfectly plastic material, Steel with a yield
strength of 206.8 MPa.
•• Apply fixed restraint to the top face (Figure 8.7).
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

136 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

•• Apply a pressure of 16 MPa as shown in Figure 8.7.


•• Mesh with second order solid elements, element size of 2 mm or less.
•• Find the linear solution.
•• Find the nonlinear solution with elastic-perfectly plastic material; a small
displacement assumption may be used.
•• Compare displacements and stress results from the above solutions.
•• Perform several mesh refinements in the nonlinear model; observe that the
maximum stress does not change.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

9
Modal Analysis

9.1. D
 ifferences between Modal and
Static Analysis
Modal analysis, also called frequency analysis, finds the modes of vibration of a structure.
The mode of vibration is defined by the frequency and the shape of vibration. Each mode
of vibration, with its frequency and the associated shape, corresponds to the situation where
stiffness forces cancel out with inertial forces. Mode of vibration describes the body vibrating
in the absence of excitation force and damping. Even though a real-life structure has an
infinite number of degrees of freedom it still has discrete modes of vibration.
We recall the fundamental FEM equation, applicable to static analysis:

 K   d    F  (9.1)

To consider dynamic effects, Equation (9.1) needs to be extended to account for inertial
and damping effects and for the fact that load is a function of time.

© 2023 SAE International 139


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

140 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

Md  C d  K d  F  t  (9.2)

where
[M] is the mass matrix, which is known
[C] is the damping matrix, which is known
[K] is the stiffness matrix, which is known
[F] is the vector of nodal loads, which is known
[d] is the unknown vector of nodal displacements

Modal analysis deals with free and undamped vibrations, where F(t) = 0 (no excitation
force) and [C] = 0 (no damping). Therefore, Equation (9.1) is simplified to

Md  K d  0 (9.3)

Finding nonzero solutions to Equation (9.3) presents an eigenvalue problem. A solution


to an eigenvalue problem finds the modal frequencies and associated modal shapes
of vibration.

K  i  i 2 M i (9.4)

Equation (9.3) has n solutions, where n is the number of DOFs in the system, ωi2 is the
eigenvalue, and the corresponding vector {φ}i is the eigenvector. The relationship between
eigenvalue and frequency expressed in Hertz [Hz] is

fi  i /2 (9.5)

9.2. Interpretation of Displacement and


Stress Results in Modal Analysis
Referring to Equation (9.3) we notice that if d is a solution satisfying Equation (9.3), then
d multiplied by a number is also a solution. Therefore, modal analysis cannot provide any
quantitative information on displacements and, consequently, on stresses.
FEA programs take different approaches to present the displacement results in modal
analysis. One approach is to normalize displacement results so that the maximum displace-
ment reads 1 of whatever unit of length is used. Some programs present those normalized
displacement plots without any units to avoid confusion with real displacements. Not all
programs provide users with stress results in modal analysis. If they do that, it is important
to remember that stress calculation is based on the normalized displacements and has
nothing to do with real stress.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 9 Modal Analysis 141

FIGURE 9.1 Plot of resultant displacement in the first mode of vibration of a box. There
are no units on the color legend. The numerical values are normalized. Results may be used
only to find the ratio between displacements in different portions of the model. In this case
the ratio between the displacement in two selected locations is 1.25.

0.8 1.0
1.00

0.92

0.83

0.75

0.67

0.58

0.50

0.42

0.33

0.25
© SAE International.

0.17

0.08

0.00

Displacements calculated in the modal analysis may be used to compare relative


displacements between different portions of the analyzed structure; the same applies to
stresses. Any comparison can be made only in a qualitative sense and only within the same
mode (Figure 9.1). Comparing results between different modes is invalid.

9.3. M
 odal Analysis with Rigid Body
Motions
Rigid Body Motions (RBMs) are allowed in modal analysis. Modal analysis can
be executed on a partially supported model or on a model with no supports at all. Rigid
Body Motion is displacement not associated with deformation; hence, the name “rigid.”
Modes corresponding to RBMs are called Rigid Body Modes and are assigned the
frequency of zero. An unsupported 3D model has six Rigid Body Modes with zero
frequency corresponding to six RBMs, which are translations along the three directions
and rotations about the three directions (Figure 9.2). The first mode of vibration that
is associated with deformation is mode number 7. The first two elastic modes of the
model airplane are shown in Figure 9.3.
An analysis of a partially supported model returns as many zero frequency modes as
many RBMs are found in the model. A ball joint assembly is shown in Figure 9.4. Assuming
that the base is fully restrained, the ball has three RBMs, which are rotations about the
three orthogonal axes. The base is included in the assembly only for show because a ball
support joint may be modeled by restraining the spherical surface of the ball in a spherical
coordinate system. This will be done in one of the hands-on exercises in this chapter.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

142 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 9.2 Model airplane with no supports has six RBMs: three translations and three
rotations. The model in the original position is shown in gray color. In this example, directions
of translations and rotations are aligned with the global coordinate system, but this is not
always the case.

y
Rigid Body Mode 1— Rigid Body Mode 2— Rigid Body Mode 3—
translation along x translation along y translation along z
z x

© SAE International.
Rigid Body Mode 4— Rigid Body Mode 5— Rigid Body Mode 6—
rotation about x rotation about y rotation about z

FIGURE 9.3 The first two elastic modes of vibration of an unsupported airplane.

© SAE International.
First elastic mode Second elastic mode
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 9 Modal Analysis 143

FIGURE 9.4 A ball joint has three RBMs; these are presented as Rigid Body Modes. The
undeformed shape (gray) is superimposed on the deformed part. The analysis is conducted
on one part and the ball joint socket (magenta) is for show only. All plots are shown in the
same position relative to the global coordinate system.

Y
© SAE International.

Z X
RBM 1 RBM 2 RBM 3
Rotation about x Rotation about y Rotation about z First Elastic Mode

9.4. Importance of Supports in Modal


Analysis
Natural frequencies strongly depend on the applied supports. Most often adding
restraints increases the natural frequencies because the restraints increase stiffness.
However, adding restraints may also have the opposite effect. Natural frequencies may
decrease because restraints may change the effective mass participating in vibration.
As shown in Figure 9.5, the unsupported link has six RBMs. The first elastic mode is
mode number 7. The shape of the first elastic mode demonstrates that the unsupported
link vibrates about its center of mass resulting in a low effective mass participating in
vibration. The hinge-supported model has no RBMs; the shape of the first elastic mode
shows that the center of mass participates in vibration and the effective mass is higher
producing lower frequency.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

144 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 9.5 The first elastic mode of vibration of unsupported (top) and hinge-supported
links (bottom). The undeformed shape is overlaid on the deformed shape. In the unsupported
link, the vibration takes place about the center of mass. In the hinge-supported link the center
of mass participates in vibration.

First elastic mode of the unsupported link


Frequency 829 Hz

Hinge Hinge

© SAE International.
First elastic mode of the supported link
Frequency 564 Hz

9.5. A
 pplications of Modal Analysis
9.5.1. F
 inding Modal Frequencies and Associated
Shapes of Vibration
The frequency and the associated shape of vibration together define the mode of vibration.
The mode of vibration is the structural property of an object. Most often only the first few
modes of vibration are of interest. Knowing natural frequencies and the associated shapes
is important in preventing unwanted vibration.
To demonstrate a sample of results provided by modal analysis, we use a tuning fork
designed to vibrate with a frequency of 440 Hz. This mode is shown in Figure 9.6.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 9 Modal Analysis 145

FIGURE 9.6 A tuning fork vibrating with a frequency of 440 Hz. The undeformed shape is
superimposed on the deformed plot. The color legend is normalized to 1. The numbers can
be used only to find the ratio between displacements in different locations in the model.
Absolute values are meaningless.

1.00
0.92
0.83
0.75
0.67
0.58
0.50
0.42
0.33
0.25
© SAE International.

0.17
0.08
0.00

9.5.2. Locating “Weak Spots” in Structure


Results of modal analysis provide important qualitative information such as locating “elastic
hinges,” which are stiffer regions surrounded by relatively softer areas. The locations of
“elastic hinges” may be identified using animated modal shapes. If your program provides
stress results in modal analysis, the distribution of stresses offers valuable insight into the
structural properties of the analyzed model. Stress concentrations highlight locations that
are naturally predisposed to experience structural failure (Figure 9.7). That information can
be used, for example, to decide where to place strain gauges in experimental stress analysis.

FIGURE 9.7 The first two modes of vibration of an unsupported box. Stress
concentrations highlight potential “weak spots” indicated by arrows. In this case the first two
modes highlight the same location. Von Mises stress is used in these plots.
© SAE International.

Mode 1 Mode 2
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

146 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

9.5.3. M
 odal Analysis Provides Input to Vibration
Analysis
In addition to providing very important results on its own, modal analysis is a prerequisite
to vibration analysis based on the Modal Superposition Method. Vibration analysis based
on the Modal Superposition Method assumes that the vibration response of a model can
be represented by superposition of responses of several Single Degree of Freedom (SDOF)
systems corresponding to the modes of vibrations considered for analysis. This will
be discussed in Chapter 11.

9.6. Pre-stress Modal Analysis


Pre-stress modal analysis is also called pre-load modal analysis, these two terms are inter-
changeable. Natural frequencies may significantly depend on the applied load if that load
changes the structure stiffness. If that is the case, modal analysis needs to account for pre-
stress. Predominantly tensile stresses increase natural frequencies. That can be observed
in rotating components like a turbine blade or a helicopter rotor. Rotating machinery
typically requires considering the effect of pre-stress (Figure 9.8).
Compressive stresses decrease natural frequencies. As an example, consider a
column under a compressive force. As the compressive force increases, the first modal
shape remains the same while the first natural frequency decreases (Figure 9.9). It is
interesting to notice that the load magnitude corresponding to zero frequency equals
the buckling load (Figure 9.10).
A word of caution: it is a severe error to confuse the pre-load with excitation load.
Remember that excitation load does not exist in modal analysis.

FIGURE 9.8 The frequency of vibration in the first mode of a helicopter blade is strongly
influenced by tensile stresses produced by the centrifugal force. There are slight differences
between frequencies of the four blades caused by a discretization error associated with
meshing. Therefore, the first four modes show modal shapes of one blade at a time. The
analysis may be done using only one blade.

© SAE International.

Rotor not moving— Rotor spinning at 180 RPM—


frequency 0.54 Hz frequency 3.3 Hz
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 9 Modal Analysis 147

FIGURE 9.9 Frequency of the first mode of vibration of the column is strongly influenced
by the applied compressive load producing compressive stresses.
© SAE International.

Unloaded column Column loaded with 87% of buckling load


Frequency 6.85 Hz Frequency 1.72 Hz

FIGURE 9.10 The first natural frequency of a column as a function of the magnitude of
compressive load. The graph shows that compressive load reduces the first natural
frequency. The magnitude of compressive load that reduces the first natural frequency to
zero (red marker) is the buckling load.

8.0

6.0
Frequency [Hz]

4.0

2.0
© SAE International.

0.0
0 5000 10000 15000 20000 25000

Compressive load [N]


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

148 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

9.7. S
 ymmetry and Anti-symmetry
Boundary Conditions in Modal
Analysis
Modes of vibration of a structure with mirror symmetry are either symmetric or anti-symmetric.
This makes it possible to conduct modal analysis on one-half of a symmetric model, but that has
to be done twice: first with mirror symmetry boundary conditions and then with anti-symmetry
boundary conditions. Mirror symmetry boundary conditions eliminate anti-symmetric modes,
and anti-symmetry boundary conditions eliminate symmetric modes. One-half of a symmetric
model can be used to extract all modes of vibration if the results of the modal analysis with
symmetry boundary condition are combined with the results of the modal analysis of the same
model with anti-symmetry boundary conditions; this is illustrated in Figure 9.11 and Table 9.1.
The overhead required to manage two sets of results is quite high and is worth the effort only in
the case of a large model that could not be solved without cutting it in half.

FIGURE 9.11 One-half of a model with a mirror symmetry model can be used to extract
all modes of vibration. Results of two modal analyses: with mirror symmetry boundary
conditions and with anti-symmetry boundary conditions must be combined.

Half model with symmetry BC


to find symmetric modes

Half model with anti-symmetry BC


© SAE International.

to find anti-symmetric modes


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 9 Modal Analysis 149

9.8. C
 onvergence of Modal Frequencies
In Chapter 4 we explained that during any convergence process, DOFs are added to the
model and, in effect, “artificial stiffness” resulting from approximations imposed by meshing
are reduced. That makes the FE model softer. The same mechanism works when the conver-
gence process is conducted in modal analysis. As a result of the model becoming softer,
modal frequencies converge from above. Therefore, the results of modal analysis overesti-
mate modal frequencies (Figure 9.12).

FIGURE 9.12 Frequency of the first mode of vibration of the bracket meshed with three
meshes. The frequency converges from above with mesh refinement. A default mesh is
usually sufficient for modal analysis.

Coarse mesh Default mesh Fine mesh

1200

1000
Frequency [Hz]

800
Coarse mesh
600
Default mesh
400
Fine mesh

200
© SAE International.

0
1 2 3
Mode number
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

150 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

9.9. M
 eshing Consideration for Modal
Analysis
As shown in Figure 9.12, the results of modal analysis are not strongly dependent on the
element size. Generally, modal analysis requires less refined mesh than structural stress
analysis of the same model. This is similar to displacement analysis requiring less refined
mesh than stress analysis. Small details, important for stress analysis, can be safely removed
from the model as long the analysis objective is to find the modes of vibration only. However,
make sure that defeaturing does not change the model stiffness or mass significantly.
If modal analysis needs to provide data for the subsequent vibration analysis, and the
objective of vibration analysis is to find stresses, then small details must be included in the
model just like in static stress analysis.

9.10. Hands-On Exercises


9.10.1. T
 UNING FORK
Description
A short duration excitation makes the tuning fork vibrate with a frequency of 440 Hz which
serves as a tuning standard for the musical note of A above middle C (Figure 9.6). Even
though the tuning fork is designed to vibrate with a frequency of 440 Hz, the results of the
modal analysis report different frequencies of the first mode, depending on the supports.
The tuning fork will be analyzed first with a fixed restraint applied to the ball at the end of
the stem and next without any restraints.

Objective
Study the results of modal analysis with and without supports.

Procedure

•• Apply the material properties (Stainless Steel).


•• Specify at least 10 modes to be calculated.
•• Mesh and obtain solution with fixed support applied to the ball.
•• Delete the support.
•• Mesh and obtain solution without support.
•• Compare results for both solutions.

Comments
Observe that solution with no supports returns six modes with zero frequency corre-
sponding to six rigid body modes. The first non-zero frequency mode (or the first elastic
mode) is the fundamental frequency of the tuning fork: 440 Hz. The modal solution with
supports returns three modes with a frequency lower than 440 Hz, but those modes require
support to exist. Therefore, they are damped through the support, allowing the supported
tuning fork to vibrate at 440 Hz.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 9 Modal Analysis 151

9.10.2. BOX
Description
Review displacement results in the first elastic mode and probe displacements in the selected
locations to find the ratio between displacements in the selected locations (Figure 9.7).
Observe that numerical values of displacement are meaningless. If your program supports
this option, analyze stress results for each mode; locate “weak spots” corresponding to each
mode. Perform several mesh refinements and analyze the convergence of modal frequen-
cies, noting that they converge from above.

Objective
Demonstrate modal analysis used to locate “weak spots.”

Procedure
•• Apply the material properties of ABS Plastic (E = 2410 MPa, ν = 0.39, ρ = 1070 kg/m3);
notice that material density is required in modal analysis.
•• Specify at least 10 modes to be calculated.
•• Mesh and obtain the modal solutions with and without support.

Comments
Displacements and stress results are meaningless; still those results are assigned numbers
which are results of internal normalizing of results.

9.10.3. AIRPLANE
Description
An airplane model has no supports, it has six RBMs; there is no deformation associated
with these modes (Figure 9.2). The first elastic mode is mode number 7, this mode is associ-
ated with deformation of the model.

Objective
Review Rigid Body Modes and Elastic Modes of an unsupported model.

Procedure

•• Apply the material properties: Nylon 101 (E = 1000 MPa, ν = 0.3, ρ = 1150 kg/m3).
•• Do not define any restraints.
•• Specify at least 12 modes to be calculated.
•• Mesh and solve.
•• Animate six Rigid Body Modes and notice that they show three translations and
three rotations of the model as a rigid body. In this exercise translations and rotations
are aligned with the global coordinate system.
•• Animate six elastic modes and observe that modal shapes are either symmetric or
antisymmetric; this happens because the model geometry is symmetric.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

152 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

Comments
The model with no restraints is used in this example, but symmetric and anti-symmetric
modes may be also observed in any restrained model if geometry and restraints are symmetric.

9.10.4. BALL
Description
A ball joint (a spherical kinematic pair) has three RBMs, these are three rotations: about
the x, y, and z axes (Figure 9.4). The modal analysis finds these RBMs and models them as
Rigid Body Modes frequency of 0 Hz. The first elastic mode is mode number 4. This exercise
is conducted using one part; the assembly shown in Figure 9.4 is not used.

Objective
Review Modes of a partially supported model with Rigid Body Modes associated with rotation.

Procedure

•• Apply the material properties: Aluminum Alloy.


•• Define the restraints on the spherical face in a spherical coordinate system associated
with that face; restrain radial translations; this simulates a ball joint support.
•• Specify at least six modes of vibration to be calculated.
•• Mesh and solve.
•• Animate the displacement results.

Comments
The first three modes are Rigid Body Modes corresponding to three rotations; the frequency
reported for these modes is 0 Hz. Mode number 4 and higher are elastic modes associated
with deformation of the model.

9.10.5. LINK03
Description
A link is supported by two hinges restraining radial and axial translations on the faces
of two holes (Figure 9.5). Next, the supports are removed leaving the link with six
RBMs. We need to find the first natural frequency of the fully supported and
unsupported link.

Objective
Demonstrate the effect of mass participation on the natural frequencies.

Procedure

•• Apply the material properties (Aluminum Alloy).


•• Specify at least ten modes to be calculated.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 9 Modal Analysis 153

•• Define two hinge supports by restraining the radial and the axial translation on both
cylindrical faces. Each hinge support must be defined in its own local cylindrical
coordinate system.
•• Obtain the modal solution with hinge supports.
•• Delete hinge supports.
•• Obtain the modal solution without supports; expect six Rigid Body Modes.
•• Compare the frequency and the shape of the first mode in the fully supported and
unsupported model.

Comments
Observe that corresponding modal frequencies are lower for the unsupported link because
the unsupported shaft vibrates about its center of mass and less mass participates in vibration.

9.10.6. H
 ELICOPTER BLADE
Description
A simplified model of a helicopter rotor has four blades (Figure 9.8). The natural frequencies
of each blade differ slightly due to the discretization error.

Objective
Demonstrate the effect of pre-stress produced by the centrifugal forces on the natural first
frequency of the blade.

Procedure

•• Define the fixed restraints to the hub.


•• Find the first 16 modes of vibration without the centrifugal force.
•• Define the centrifugal load with an angular velocity of 180 RPM.
•• Find the first 16 modes of vibration with the centrifugal force.
•• Compare the results without and with the centrifugal force present.

Comments
Observe that the applied angular velocity generates a centrifugal load that produces tensile
stresses in the blades. Due to the stress stiffening effect, tensile stresses increase the blade
stiffness. Consequently, the natural frequencies of the spinning blade are higher than the
frequencies of the blade that is not moving. The pre-load may also change the shapes of
vibration. In this exercise this effect is visible in higher modes.
The modal analysis with pre-stress is executed in three steps. The first step is calculating
stresses in linear static analysis. The second step is using the stress solution to modify the
model stiffness. Finally, the modal analysis is run on the model with the modified stiffness
(Figure 9.13). These steps are transparent to the user.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

154 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 9.13 Frequencies of the first 16 modes of the helicopter rotor without and with
the effect of stress stiffening due to the centrifugal force. The series 1-4, 5-8, 9-12, and 13-16
correspond to different blades vibrating in the same mode. Minute differences in frequencies
within each series are caused by discretization errors. These differences are too small to show
in this graph.

120

100

80
Frequency [Hz]

60
0 RPM
180 RPM
40

20

© SAE International.
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Mode number

9.10.7. COLUMN
Description
The effect of compressive stresses on the natural frequency is illustrated here (Figure 9.9).
The analysis requires several runs with gradually increasing load magnitude until the solver
produces an error message. The exercise requires linear buckling analysis to find the
buckling force. Therefore, you may skip this exercise for now and return to it after completing
Chapter 10. You may also calculate the buckling force using Euler’s formula. Use k = 2 as
the end conditions factor used when the loaded end is free.

2 EI
Pcritical  (9.6)
 kL 
2

where E = 190000 MPa, I = 199 mm4, and L = 2010 mm, k = 2.

Objective
Demonstrate the effect of compressive load on modal frequencies.

Procedure

•• Define the material properties: Steel.


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 9 Modal Analysis 155

•• Define the fixed support to the bottom end face of the channel.
•• Specify one or more buckling modes to be found, buckling analysis is needed to
provide the load magnitude for modal analysis with pre-load.
•• Mesh and solve to find the Buckling Load Factor (BLF) or find the buckling force
using Euler’s formula.
•• Run six modal analyses with pre-stress using compressive load with increasing
magnitude: 0%, 20%, 40%, 60%, 85%, 95% of the buckling load.
•• Summarize the results in a graph as shown in Figure 9.10.

Comments
The last modal analysis with pre-stress will report a low frequency because the pre-load is
close to the buckling load. To extend this exercise, try running the analysis again with 100%
of buckling load and observe that the solver produces an error message because the model
has zero stiffness in the direction of the first mode of vibration. Now run the analysis with
the pre-load equal to 99.9% of buckling load: the natural frequency will be very low; the
model has almost no stiffness and that stiffness comes mostly from the artificial stiffness
added to the model by discretization. You now have a tool to demonstrate the presence of
the artificial stiffness. Run the modal analysis again with a pre-load of 99.9% but with a
more refined mesh. The solver will crash because the artificial stiffness has decreased, and
the model has lost the stiffness in the direction of the first mode of vibration. Finally, run
the modal analysis once again with a pre-load of 99.9% but with a coarse mesh. Observe
an increase in the natural frequency. A strong dependence of the results on the meshing
choice makes these results meaningless.

9.10.8. B
 RACKET03
Description
Symmetry in the BRACKET03 model includes the mirror symmetry of geometry and
restraints (Figure 9.11). Taking advantage of that symmetry, the modal analysis may
be completed on one-half of the model with symmetry and then with anti-symmetry
boundary conditions. Analysis of the model with the mirror symmetry boundary condi-
tions finds symmetric modes. Analysis of the model with anti-symmetry finds anti-
symmetric modes. This way modes with symmetric shapes and anti-symmetric shapes
are separated. Combining the results of two analyses provides the full set of modes
of vibration.

Objective
Perform modes separation using symmetry and anti-symmetry boundary conditions.

Procedure

•• Apply the material properties: ABS Plastic (E = 2000 MPa, ν = 0.394, ρ = 1020 kg/m3).
•• Apply a fixed support to the back face.
•• Run the modal analysis to find the six modes of vibration.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

156 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

•• If you use Parasolid geometry, cut the model in half; if you use SOLIDWORKS
geometry, switch to configuration 02 half.
•• Obtain the modal solution (six modes) for the half model with mirror symmetry
boundary conditions.
•• Obtain the modal solution (six modes) for the half model with anti-symmetry
boundary conditions.
•• Combine the solutions obtained with mirror symmetry and with anti-symmetry
boundary conditions as shown in Table 9.1.

Comments
Observe that combining solutions produced by the half model with mirror symmetry and
then with anti-symmetry boundary conditions produces the full set of results. Assemble
the symmetric and anti-symmetric solutions and sort results by the ascending order of
modal frequencies.

TABLE 9.1 Modal results from the full model, half model with mirror symmetry boundary
conditions, and half model with anti-symmetry boundary conditions.
Half-model Half-model
symmetric modes anti-symmetric
Mode number Mode description Full model [Hz] [Hz] modes [Hz]
1 Symmetric 412 412
2 Anti-symmetric 720 720
3 Anti-symmetric 1034 1034
4 Symmetric 1808 1814
5 Symmetric 2359 2365
6 Symmetric 2533 2538
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

10
Buckling Analysis

T
he phenomenon of buckling is best presented in the context of two other failure
modes: excessive displacements and yielding as summarized in Table 10.1. Buckling
is often overlooked as a mode of failure; therefore, understanding buckling analysis
with FEA is particularly important.
Buckling analysis is available in commercial FEA programs under the name Buckling
Analysis. It is also available as a part of Nonlinear Analysis. This fragmentized approach
may lead to a misunderstanding of what Buckling Analysis really is. The following discus-
sion should help understand the buckling analysis performed with FEA as well as the
buckling phenomenon itself.

© 2023 SAE International 159


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

160 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

TABLE 10.1 Selected modes of failure.

Mode of failure Level of recognition Characteristics


Yielding A well-recognized Typically, a local failure mode
mode of failure Local yielding may often be tolerated
Does not necessarily lead to structural collapse
Yielding is relatively easy to model with FEA
Excessive At times overlooked This is a global failure mode
displacement mode of failure Excessive displacements may render the design unusable
but do not have to lead to a structural collapse
Displacements are easy to model using FEA
Buckling Often overlooked This is a global failure mode
mode of failure Happens without any visible warning
Almost always leads to a structural collapse
Buckling is difficult to model with FEA

10.1. L
 inear Buckling Analysis
Linear buckling analysis is also referred to as Eigenvalue Buckling analysis or Euler’s
Buckling. Linear buckling analysis is in many aspects similar to modal analysis (Table 10.2).
Linear buckling analysis is easy to execute but has important limitations.
The linear buckling analysis calculates buckling loads and the associated buckling
shapes. Buckling takes place when, because of subtracting stress stiffness induced by
compressive load from elastic stiffness, the resultant structure stiffness drops to zero. It is
important to remember that the loss of stiffness in buckling happens in the direction normal
to the applied compressive load, it happens in the direction of the first mode of vibration.
This remains in close analogy to modal analysis with compressive pre-load where the stress
stiffness is subtracted from the elastic stiffness also producing zero resultant stiffness.
FEA programs offer a choice of how many buckling modes should be found.
Theoretically, as many buckling modes as the number of degrees of freedom in the FEA
model could be calculated but in practice only the first buckling mode with positive buckling
load factor is important.
Results of linear buckling analysis do not report the buckling load directly. Instead, the
results present the Buckling Load Factor (BLF). The BLF is a number by which the applied
load must be multiplied by (or divided—depending on the FEA program) to obtain the
magnitude of the buckling load. The buckling mode presents the shape that the structure
assumes when it buckles but says nothing about the numerical values of the displacements
or stresses. The numerical values can be displayed but are meaningless. This is in close analogy
to modal analysis which calculates the natural frequency and provides qualitative information
on the modes of vibration (modal shapes), but not on the actual magnitude of displacements.
If more than one buckling mode is requested, the buckling modes are reported in
ascending order according to their numerical values. A buckling mode with a negative BLF
TABLE 10.2 Analogies and terminology used in buckling and modal analysis.

Buckling analysis Modal analysis


Eigenvalue Load causing buckling The square of the natural frequency
(rad/s)
Eigenvector Mode (shape) assumed by the structure Mode (shape) assumed by the
when loaded with the buckling load structure as it vibrates with the
natural frequency
How many modes The first mode with a positive buckling Usually, the first few modes
are important? load factor
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 10 Buckling Analysis 161

means that the load direction must be reversed (in addition to multiplying by the BLF) for
the buckling to happen. The first positive BLF marks the mode of interest.
To illustrate the linear buckling analysis, we use a model of a column in compression; the
column material is 1060 Alloy. We study this model in two configurations: with a free end and
a sliding end. Before proceeding, notice a small notch and try to predict which way the column
will buckle in each configuration. The importance of the notch will soon become clear.
Figure 10.1 shows the results of the linear buckling analysis of a column with the free end.
The BLF is 566, therefore considering that 1 N load has been applied, the buckling happens at
566 N. The column has buckled toward the side opposite to the notch. This result is purely coin-
cidental; linear buckling analysis can predict the buckled shape, but not the direction of buckling.
Figure 10.2 shows the result of the analysis of the column with the sliding end. The BLF
is 9622; this is much higher than before because the sliding support makes the column
much stiffer. The direction of buckling shown in Figure 10.2 is purely coincidental. The color
legends with displacement magnitudes in Figures 10.1 and 10.2 are shown only to point out
their meaninglessness in terms of absolute numbers.
Linear buckling analysis cannot provide any quantitative results for displacements or
stresses. It does not provide an answer to what happens to the structure after buckling. Will
it collapse, or will it retain the load-bearing ability in the buckled shape? How much will
it deform when it buckles?

FIGURE 10.1 A notched column is subjected to a compressive load 1 N. A fixed restraint is


applied to the end face opposite to the loaded side. The loaded end is not restrained in any
way. The Buckling Load Factor found in this analysis is 566 meaning that the load of 566 N will
cause buckling according to linear buckling analysis. The displacement scale is normalized to 1.
The bottom illustration shows the first buckling mode. The undeformed shape is superim-
posed on the deformed shape. Numbers may be used only to find the ratio between displace-
ments in different locations and only within the same buckling mode. Here the ratio of displace-
ments between the indicated locations is 1.00/0.27 = 3.7.

1.00
Column under compression 0.92
0.83
0.75
0.67
0.58
0.50
0.42
0.27 0.33
0.25
© SAE International.

0.17
0.08
Deformed shape in the first buckling mode 1.00 0.00
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

162 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 10.2 A notched column is subjected to a compressive load 1 N. A fixed restraint is


applied to the end face opposite to the loaded side. The loaded end may slide in the direction
of the load. The Buckling Load Factor found in this analysis is 9563 meaning that the load of
9563 N will cause buckling. The displacement scale is normalized to 1.

1.00
Column under compression 0.92
0.83
0.75
0.67
0.58
0.50
0.42
0.33
0.25

© SAE International.
0.17
0.08
Deformed shape in the first buckling mode 0.00

FEA software can find any number of buckling shapes and associated buckling loads.
However, usually only the first mode (load and the associated shape) needs to be found
because higher buckling modes have no chance of appearing. Buckling most often causes
catastrophic failure or renders the structure unusable even if the structure may still be able
to hold the load. The first four buckling modes of the column with free end, loaded with
1 N compressive load, are shown in Figure 10.3.
If we are looking for answers beyond the Buckling Load Factor and the buckled shape,
we need to use the nonlinear buckling analysis.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 10 Buckling Analysis 163

FIGURE 10.3 The first four buckling modes of the notched column. The Buckling Load
Factor (BLF) relates to a compressive load of 1 N. Only mode 1 is of practical importance; the
other three modes have no chance to appear.

Mode 1
BLF = 566

Mode 2
BLF = 5094

Mode 3
BLF = 9020
© SAE International.

Mode 4
BLF = 1404

10.2. C
 onvergence of Results in Linear
Buckling Analysis
Just like modal frequencies in modal analysis, buckling load factors converge from above.
Therefore, buckling analysis overestimates buckling load and because of discretization error
provides non-conservative results. However, the results of buckling analysis are also over-
estimated due to modeling simplifications. Finite element model represents a geometry
with no imperfections, loads and supports are applied with perfect accuracy with no offsets,
etc. In reality the load is always applied with an offset, walls are never perfectly flat, supports
are never rigid, etc. Considering the combined effect of both discretization error and
modeling error, the results of the buckling analysis must be used with caution.

10.3. N
 onlinear Buckling Analysis
Buckling is inherently a nonlinear phenomenon. Compressive loads produce compressive
stresses which, in turn, generate negative stress stiffness. If compressive loads are high
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

164 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

enough, then the negative stress stiffness cancels with elastic stiffness making the resultant
stiffness zero in the direction of the first mode of vibration. While we may expect the column
under a compressive load to respond by displacement in the direction of load, the column
“slips out sideways from under the load.” This is what we call buckling.
Linear buckling analysis can only find combinations of load and deformed shape that
produce the cancellation of stiffness. These results, while useful, do not describe the buckling
fully. An in-depth analysis of buckling requires a nonlinear approach. As with any other
nonlinear analysis, the nonlinear buckling analysis requires that load be applied gradually
in multiple steps rather than in one step as it is done in a linear analysis. Each load incre-
ment changes the structure’s shape and stiffness.
The gradual load application, always necessary in a nonlinear analysis, can
be conducted in different ways. The process illustrated in Figure 10.4 is called the Load
Control method and is used in most types of nonlinear analyses, but not in the
buckling analysis.
When buckling happens, the structure experiences a momentary loss of stiffness, and
the load control method would result in numerical instabilities. For this reason, the
nonlinear buckling analysis requires another way of controlling the load application process
which is called the Arc-Length Control method, shown in Figure 10.5. Using the Arc-Length
Control method points corresponding to consecutive load increments are evenly spaced
out along the load-displacement curve.
The nonlinear buckling analysis does calculate displacements and stresses. To under-
stand the inner workings of a nonlinear buckling analysis, we must first consider what
happens if we run a nonlinear buckling analysis on an idealized structure. Imagine a
perfectly straight column under a perfectly aligned compressive load. Theoretically, buckling
will never happen, but in reality, the column will buckle because of imperfections always

FIGURE 10.4 Force Control Method. Load steps are defined either automatically or by the
user so that stiffness change between consecutive steps is not too large.
Displacement

© SAE International.

Load
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 10 Buckling Analysis 165

FIGURE 10.5 Arc-Length Control method. The load is increased in such a way that
consecutive steps are evenly spaced out along the load-displacement curve.

Displacement
© SAE International.

Load

present in the geometry, loads, and supports. If imperfections are absent in the FEA model,
buckling will still happen, but it will be initiated by imperfections introduced by meshing.
Therefore, the nonlinear buckling requires a model with an intentional imperfection. If no
such imperfections exist, they must be added to control the onset of buckling. In our case
the imperfection is the notch shown in Figures 10.1 and 10.2. Another approach is to run
the analysis on a slightly deformed model in shape based on the scaled result of linear
buckling analysis.
Figure 10.6 shows the buckled shape and numerical values of displacement in the Y
direction of the loaded end. The compressive force acts in the negative x direction and does
not change its direction. The column buckles toward the notched side as it should. The
buckling takes place at about 560 N, the load magnitude is close to what the linear buckling
analysis predicted.
Once buckling takes place, the displacement grows at an almost constant force. The
graph stops at 40 mm, but the analysis could have been run further. That implies that the
column would be capable of supporting 550 N acting at an increasing offset, meaning that
it can withstand a large bending moment even though that cannot happen because of
material yielding.
Figure 10.6 shows the results of a nonlinear analysis where the only source of nonlinear
behavior is buckling. The material is linear elastic, and yielding is ignored. This is unrealistic;
experiments demonstrate that buckling initiates a chain of events shown in Figure 10.7.
To model a buckling event, we must account for yielding which is another source of
nonlinearity. We will do so by using the elastic-perfectly plastic material discussed in
Chapter 8. The deformed shape and the load-displacement curve produced by the model
with elastic-perfectly plastic material are shown in Figure 10.8.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

166 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 10.6 Y displacement component in the notched column with a free end. A linear
material model is used.

47.2
43.3
39.4
y 35.4
31.5
Notch
27.6
x
23.6
19.7
15.7
11.8
45
7.9
40
3.9
35 0.0

30

25
Uy [mm]

20

15

10

© SAE International.
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600
Force [N]

The buckling still happens at 560 N indicating that the onset of buckling takes place
while the material is still in the elastic range. The steep climbing portion of the curve leading
to the maximum load corresponds to the elastic buckling. Once stresses reach the yield,
the load rapidly drops because, to maintain equilibrium, the applied force must be reduced.
If the force stays the same, as is most often the case, the end of the vertical portion of the
curve (red marker) indicates the structural collapse. At this point, the column is totally
plasticized and can no longer support the offset load. Examine the deformed shape and
notice that most of the deformation takes place at the support where the plastic hinge develops.
We will now conduct two analyses of the same column but with a sliding restraint on
the loaded end. The first analysis will use a linear material model, the second an elastic-
perfectly plastic material model. The linear material model (Figure 10.9) predicts buckling
at about 9500 N, which is close to the results of linear buckling analysis.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 10 Buckling Analysis 167

FIGURE 10.7 Chain of events initiated by buckling leads to a structural collapse.

BUCKLING

LARGE DISPLACEMENTS

LARGE BENDING STRESSES

YIELD
© SAE International.

STRUCTURAL COLLAPSE

However, a load this high causes yielding of the entire cross-section in the notched
area, and that cannot be modeled with a linear elastic material model. Using the elastic-
perfectly plastic model (Figure 10.10), we see that buckling takes place at 2500 N when the
notched cross-section is completely plastic.
Buckling does not have to lead to a structural collapse. To illustrate this, we review a
model of a thin, round, spherical steel plate loaded and supported as shown in Figure 10.11.
Linear buckling analysis predicts that buckling takes place at 0.8 MPa (Figure 10.12).
The linear buckling analysis is followed by two nonlinear analyses: first with a linear
material model and then with an elastic-perfectly plastic material model. Both solutions
use the Arc-Length Control of load. The load increments continue until the resultant
displacement exceeds 0.5 mm. The results of the linear analysis are shown in Figure 10.13.
The results of the nonlinear analysis are shown in Figure 10.14.
The load-displacement curves in both analyses are shown in Figure 10.15. Both curves
are identical well past buckling meaning that after buckling the plate is still in the elastic state.
The graph in Figure 10.15 shows a stiffening effect in the post-buckling stage meaning
that the plate regains stiffness after the buckling has taken place and while it remains in
the elastic stage. This is a “snap-through” phenomenon sometimes called an oil-canning effect.
Results of linear buckling analysis and nonlinear buckling analysis are compared in
Table 10.3.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

168 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 10.8 Y displacement component in the notched column with a free end. An elastic-
perfectly plastic material model is used.

40.2

36.8

33.5

30.1
y
26.8
Notch
23.4
x
20.1

16.7

13.4

45 10.0

6.7
40
3.3
35
0.0

30

25
Uy [mm]

20

15

10

© SAE International.
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600
Force [N]
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 10 Buckling Analysis 169

FIGURE 10.9 Y displacement component in the notched column with the sliding end. A linear
material model is used.

0.0

–2.8
y
–5.5

–8.3
x
–11.1

–13.9
Notch –16.6

–19.4

–22.2

–25.0
0.0
–27.7
0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000
–30.5
–5.0
–33.3

–10.0

–15.0
Uy [mm]

–20.0

–25.0

–30.0
© SAE International.

–35.0
Force [N]
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

170 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 10.10 Y displacement component in the notched column with a sliding end.
An elastic-perfectly plastic material model is used.

0.0
–0.4
y
–0.8
–1.2
x Notch
–1.6
–2.0
–2.4
–2.8
–3.2
0.0
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 –3.7
–4.1
–1.0
–4.5
–4.9
–2.0
Uy [mm]

–3.0

–4.0

–5.0

© SAE International.
–6.0
Force [N]

FIGURE 10.11 A thin, round plate is subjected to pressure applied to the blue patch. Fixed
restraint is applied along the perimeter. The section view makes it easier to observe a slight
spherical curvature. The irregular shape of the patch introduces imperfections.
© SAE International.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 10 Buckling Analysis 171

FIGURE 10.12 Shape in the first buckling mode predicted by the linear buckling analysis.
The pressure causing buckling is 0.8 MPa. Displacements are normalized to 1.

1.00
0.90
0.80
0.70
0.60
0.50
0.40
0.30
© SAE International.

0.20
0.10
0.00

FIGURE 10.13 Results of nonlinear buckling analysis using a linear material model.
Section plots are used to show the curvature of the deformed plate. The maximum resultant
displacement is 0.55 mm. This value triggers the stop of the solution. The maximum von
Mises stress is 1032 MPa, it exceeds the yield strength of the material which is 620 MPa.

0.55
0.49
0.44
0.38
0.33
0.27
0.22
0.16
0.11
0.05
Resultant displacements [mm] 0.00
1032.8
931.8
830.8
729.8
628.8
527.8
426.8
325.8
© SAE International.

224.9
123.9
von Mises stress [MPa]
22.9
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

172 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 10.14 Results of nonlinear buckling analysis using an elastic-perfectly plastic


material model. Section plots are used to show the curvature of the deformed plate. The
maximum resultant displacement is 0.55 mm. This value triggers the stop of the solution. The
maximum von Mises stress is 620 MPa, equal to the yield strength of the material 620 MPa.

0.55
0.49
0.44
0.38
0.33
0.27
0.22
0.16
0.11
0.05
Resultant displacements [mm] 0.00
620.4
559.0
497.7
436.3
374.9
313.5
252.1
190.8

© SAE International.
129.4
68.0
von Mises stress [MPa]
6.6
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 10 Buckling Analysis 173

FIGURE 10.15 Load-displacement curves of two models of plate: with linear material and
with elastic-perfectly plastic material. Buckling takes place when the pressure reaches 0.26
MPa, and then deformation progresses with almost no increase in pressure until displacement
reaches 0.27 mm. After that, the plate regains stiffness in the post-buckling shape. Both
curves are identical until pressure reaches 1.5 MPa. The sensor used to construct the load-
displacement curves in both models is in the center of the round plate.

0.6

0.5

0.4
Displacement [mm]

0.3 Linear material


Nonlinear material
Buckling at 0.26 MPa
0.2

0.1
© SAE International.

0
0 0.5 1 1.5 2
Pressure [MPa]

TABLE 10.3 Comparison of results of linear and nonlinear buckling analyses.

Linear analysis Nonlinear analysis


Pressure causing buckling
0.81 MPa 0.26 MPa
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

174 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

10.4. C
 ontrolling an Onset of Buckling in
Nonlinear Buckling Analysis
In the nonlinear buckling analysis, the onset of buckling must be initiated in a controlled
way. If it is not, the model will still buckle but buckling will happen because of imperfec-
tions introduced by mesh. In the notched column exercise we controlled the onset of
buckling with a notch. In the plate exercise, we applied pressure to an irregular patch. Yet
another approach might be using a slightly curved column shaped after a scaled buckling
shape found in the linear buckling analysis (Figure 10.16).
Nonlinear buckling analysis of a stand (Figure 10.17) uses the load applied with an offset;
this is a similar approach to the plate example. Buckling analysis of a curved sheet (Figure
10.18) does not require any purposely introduced imperfection. The onset of buckling is
controlled by the sheet curvature.

FIGURE 10.16 A column similar to the column in Figure 10.1. An imperfection is


introduced as a slight curvature, there is no notch.

© SAE International.

FIGURE 10.17 A stand subjected to an offset compressive load.

© SAE International.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 10 Buckling Analysis 175

FIGURE 10.18 A curved sheet under a compressive load (magenta arrows) uniformly
distributed along the top edge. Translations of vertical edges (black arrows) in the direction
normal to Plane 1 are restrained. The bottom edge is fully supported; restraint symbols are
not shown.

Plane
1
© SAE International.

10.5. Summary
Linear buckling analysis can only provide limited information about buckling. Nonlinear
buckling analysis is often required, and one should always consider using the nonlinear
material model in nonlinear buckling analysis. What makes buckling counterintuitive is
that the onset of buckling is associated with a loss of stiffness in the direction normal to
load. If the analysis is continued past buckling, the structure can in some cases regain
stiffness in the post-buckling state. That momentary loss of stiffness requires Arc-Length
Control of load shown in Figure 10.5. The change of structure stiffness during buckling is
characterized by a load-displacement curve (Figure 10.19).
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

176 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 10.19 Solution of a problem with membrane stress stiffening (Round Plate in
Chapter 7) produces a smooth load-displacement curve; at no point stiffness becomes zero.
Force Control solution method may be used (left). The solution to the buckling problem
produces a more complicated load-displacement curve (right). A momentary loss of stiffness
requires the Arc-Length control solution (right).

Displacement

Displacement

© SAE International.
Load Load

Force control solution Arc-length control solution

10.6. Hands-On Exercises


All nonlinear buckling exercises require Arc-Length Control and definition of sensors to
construct load-displacement curves. In all exercises use the non-following load. Not all
exercises specify the load to be applied. This is to demonstrate that in linear buckling
analysis, different load magnitudes produce different buckling load factors. In nonlinear
buckling analysis, different load magnitudes call for different load multiplication factors
adjusted automatically during the Arc-Length Control solution.

10.6.1. N
 OTCHED COLUMN - Free End
Description
A compressive, non-following force is applied to a notched column (Figure 10.1). The force
produces buckling. The results strongly depend on the type of material model used: linear
elastic or elastic-perfectly plastic.

Objective
Perform three analyses: linear buckling, nonlinear buckling with a linear material model,
and nonlinear buckling analysis with an elastic-perfectly plastic material model.

Procedure

•• Define the linear material model: 1060 Alloy (E = 69000 MPa, ν = 0.33, σyield = 27.6
MPa).
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 10 Buckling Analysis 177

•• Apply a fixed support to the end face opposite to the loaded face.
•• Specify the four buckling modes to be found in linear buckling analysis.
•• Mesh and solve the linear model.
•• Define the displacement sensor at the loaded end.
•• Perform nonlinear buckling analysis; use the Arc-Length Control.
•• Construct a load-displacement curve.
•• Compare the results of linear buckling analysis and nonlinear buckling analysis.
•• Repeat Steps 1-6 using an elastic-perfectly plastic material model.

Comments
Try using different meshes and different solvers (if available) in linear buckling analysis;
you will see that the direction of buckling changes.

10.6.2. N
 OTCHED COLUMN - Sliding End
Procedure
Apply restraints to make the loaded end slide in the direction of the load (Figure 10.2).
Follow the same steps as in Exercise 10.6.1. Notice that buckling in the nonlinear analysis
buckling happens when the notched cross-section is plasticized.

10.6.3. R
 OUND PLATE02
Description
A round plate with a slight spherical curvature experiences a “snap-through” deformation
when subjected to pressure (Figure 10.11). Modeling this phenomenon requires a nonlinear
buckling analysis with Arc-Length Control.

Objective
Analyze the “snap-through” effect using nonlinear buckling analysis using linear and
nonlinear material models. Compare the results of two nonlinear buckling analyses and a
linear buckling analysis.

Procedure

•• Define the linear material properties: Alloy Steel (E = 210000 MPa, ν = 0.28, σyield
= 620 MPa).
•• Apply a pressure load to the patch on the top face.
•• Define the sensor in the center of the top face where the pressure load is applied.
•• Mesh and solve the linear buckling analysis.
•• Perform the nonlinear buckling analysis with a linear material model.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

178 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

•• Perform the nonlinear buckling analysis with an elastic-perfectly plastic material


model.
•• Construct load-displacement curves for both analyses.
•• Compare the results of the linear buckling analysis and the two nonlinear buckling
analyses. Notice that linear buckling analysis reports buckling at 0.8 MPa, which
is much higher than the results of nonlinear buckling analysis reporting buckling
at 0.26 MPa.

Comments
After the plate “snaps through,” it does not yield. It remains in the elastic state after buckling
has taken place.

10.6.4. C
 URVED COLUMN
Objective
Repeat Exercises 10.6.1 using the curved column and nonlinear material. The onset of
buckling is now controlled by a curvature of the column rather than by a notch (Figure
10.16). Use compressive, non-following load perpendicular to the supported face rather than
load normal to the loaded face.

10.6.5. S
 TAND
Description
A steel weldment is modeled as one part for the convenience of model saving (Figure 10.17).
Compressive load is applied to the yellow patch. Fixed support is applied to the bottom
face. The stand buckles sideways causing material yielding.

Objective
Perform a nonlinear buckling analysis with elastic-perfectly plastic material on a model
where the onset of buckling is controlled by an off-center load.

Procedure
•• Define an elastic-perfectly plastic material used in the previous exercises (Aluminum
or Steel).
•• Apply a fixed support to the bottom face of the base plate.
•• Apply a uniformly distributed, normal load over the yellow face.
•• Mesh and solve the linear buckling analysis.
•• Define the sensor in one of the top corners.
•• Solve nonlinear buckling analysis with the elastic-perfectly plastic material model.
•• Construct a load-displacement curve showing the displacement component in the
direction of buckling.
•• Compare the results of linear buckling analysis and nonlinear buckling analysis.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 10 Buckling Analysis 179

Comments
Stress singularities along sharp reentrant edges are eliminated by elastic-perfectly plastic
material. The maximum stress is limited to the yield strength of the material. Once the
stand begins to deform sideways and the moment arm increases, the load magnitude lowers
to keep the equilibrium.

10.6.6. C
 URVED SHEET
Description
A slightly curved steel sheet has simple supports along the vertical edges and fixed support
along the bottom edge (Figure 10.18). Compressive load is applied to the top edge. Material
is elastic-perfectly plastic. The load causes buckling in the direction toward the concave
side of the curvature.

Objective
Perform a nonlinear buckling analysis on a model where the onset of buckling is controlled
by a curvature.

Procedure

•• Define the elastic-perfectly plastic material properties: Alloy Steel (E = 210000 MPa,
ν = 0.28, σyield = 620 MPa).
•• Define a shell thickness of 2 mm.
•• Define the restraints.
•• Apply a vertical load uniformly distributed over the top edge.
•• Mesh and run the linear buckling analysis.
•• Define the sensor in the middle of the loaded edge.
•• Perform a nonlinear buckling analysis with the elastic-perfectly plastic material.
•• Construct a load-displacement curve showing the displacement component in the
direction of buckling.
•• Compare the results of the linear buckling analysis and the nonlinear buckling
analysis with nonlinear material.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

11
Vibration Analysis

A
ll types of analyses that we discussed so far assumed that loads are static, and
inertial effects are ignored. We will now lift the restriction of static load to discuss
common types of vibration analysis, but first, we will clarify an important termi-
nology issue. Many commercial FEA programs use the term “Dynamic Analysis” to
describe what we call “Vibration Analysis” in this book. The term “Dynamic Analysis”
is more general than “Vibration Analysis.” It applies to the analysis of any motion, be it
motion of a rigid body, a deformable body, or an assembly composed of rigid and deform-
able bodies. “Dynamic Analysis” within the scope of FEA deals with the vibration of
deformable bodies about the position of equilibrium; hence, the term “Vibration Analysis”
is more precise.
Vibration Analysis is a very broad topic and cannot be given an in-depth treatment in
this introductory textbook. For this reason, we will discuss only two commonly performed
types of linear vibration analysis: Time Response and Frequency Response. Next, we will
introduce the basic concepts of nonlinear vibration analysis.

11.1. M
 odal Superposition Method
The review of linear vibration analysis needs to be preceded by a discussion of the Modal
Superposition Method used in Time Response and Frequency Response analyses.

© 2023 SAE International 181


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

182 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

Each mode of vibration is characterized by the frequency and the shape of vibration.
The shape of vibration is related to the mass participating in the vibration. Furthermore,
the modal shape is associated with a certain stiffness. Collecting these facts, we may
represent an object vibrating in each mode of vibration by a linear Single Degree of Freedom
(SDOF) oscillator with mass, stiffness, and direction of oscillations. All data may be derived
from the properties of the mode of vibration under consideration. Next, we decide how
many modes are important in the vibration response of the analyzed system. For example,
if only three modes are important, the system can be represented by three SDOFs, each
one corresponding to one mode. This way the number of DOFs of the vibrating system is
reduced to just three. Instead of studying the original model with tens or hundreds of
thousands of DOFs, we may study a simple three DOFs system, where each mode is repre-
sented by one SDOF and the response of the system is found as the superposition of indi-
vidual responses of SDOFs. The concept of Modal Superposition Method is schematically
illustrated in Figure 11.1.
When vibration analysis is based on the Modal Superposition Method, the number of
SDOFs contributing to vibration response is equal to the number of modes calculated by
the prerequisite modal analysis. How many modes should be used to represent vibration
response using the Modal Superposition Method? The first few modes are always the most
important. The number of required modes depends on the range of the frequency of excita-
tion, type of analysis, code requirements to be met, and other factors. One should demon-
strate in a convergence process that increasing the number of modes past a certain number
no longer significantly affects the results.
The Modal Superposition Method simplifies vibration analysis, but the vibration
problem must be linear. The Modal Superposition Method cannot be used for nonlinear
problems. Other methods, like Direct Integration, are used in nonlinear problems.

FIGURE 11.1 A vibration system represented by three linear SDOF oscillators. Each
oscillator is characterized by its mass, stiffness, and direction of linear oscillations. It is
assumed that the three modes of vibration are sufficient to model the vibration response.

© SAE International.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 11 Vibration Analysis 183

11.2. Time Response Analysis


In Time Response Analysis the applied load is an explicit function of time. Mass and
damping are both taken into consideration, and the equation of motion appears in the full
form as

Md  C d  K d  F  t  (11.1)

where
[M] is the mass matrix, which is known
[C] is the damping matrix, which is known
[K] is the stiffness matrix, which is known
[F] is the vector of nodal loads, which is known
[d] is the vector of nodal displacements, which is unknown

Time Response Analysis requires the definition of damping, most often expressed as
a damping coefficient that specifies the percentage of the critical damping. Damping must
be defined for all modes used in the Modal Superposition Method. Refer to (1) in Chapter
15 for values of damping coefficients. Load excitation or base excitation may be used.
A typical example of Time Response Analysis is a response to an impact load of short
duration. We illustrate this with a hammer model shown in Figure 11.2. The hammer head
is subjected to an impact force with time history, as shown in Figure 11.3. Vibration time
response in the form of head displacement as a function of time is shown in Figure 11.4.
The second example presents Time Response Analysis with excitation of longer
duration. The same model of the hammer is subjected to a harmonic load shown in Figure
11.5; there is no damping in the system. The frequency of the excitation is 19 Hz, this is close
to the first natural frequency of 21 Hz of the hammer. The displacement response of the
hammer head is shown in Figure 11.6. It demonstrates the effect of beating, showing periodic
amplification and cancellation of displacement amplitude.

FIGURE 11.2 A hammer subjected to a time-dependent load; the maximum load


magnitude is 10000N.

Fixed restraint

10000 N
© SAE International.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

184 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 11.3 Load time history: the load follows a sine curve; after 0.05 s it reaches the
magnitude of 10000N and disappears after 0.1 s.

10000

8000

6000
Force [N]

4000

2000

© SAE International.
0
0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1
Time [s]

FIGURE 11.4 Displacement time history of the hammer head subjected to the impact
load. When the load disappears after 0.1 s, the hammer starts a free damped vibration.

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3
Displacement [mm]

0.2

0.1

0.0
0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1
–0.1

–0.2
© SAE International.

–0.3
Time [s]
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 11 Vibration Analysis 185

FIGURE 11.5 Time history of load excitation is a harmonic function with a frequency of 19
Hz; the maximum load magnitude is 10000 N.

10000

8000

6000

4000

2000
Force [N]

0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
–2000

–4000

–6000
© SAE International.

–8000

–10000
Time [s]

FIGURE 11.6 Displacement time history of the hammer head subjected to a harmonic
load excitation. There is no damping in the system. Periodic amplification and cancellation of
displacement magnitude is called “beating.”

2
Displacement [mm]

0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1

–2

–4
© SAE International.

–6
Time [s]
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

186 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

11.3. Frequency Response Analysis


Frequency Response Analysis assumes that the excitation load is a function of frequency
rather than being directly dependent on time.

Md  C d  K d  F   (11.2)

Frequency Response Analysis models structure response to load excitation or base


excitation. Base excitation is applied to supports as a prescribed time-dependent displace-
ment, velocity, or acceleration. Both load excitation and base excitation must be harmonic
functions of time. Frequency Response Analysis also uses the Modal Superposition Method
and requires damping to be defined for each mode considered in the modal superposition.
We review two typical applications of Frequency Response. The first one is a simulation
of a shaker table test. An elbow pipe is installed on a shaker table and subjected to the
harmonic base excitation with the frequency slowly changing from 0 Hz to 800 Hz (Figure
11.7). There are four modes of vibration within this range of frequencies (Figure 11.8).
The base excitation is defined as a displacement of 1 mm (±1 mm about the position
of equilibrium) with a constant amplitude and slowly changing the frequency of oscillation
from 0 Hz to 800 Hz. Damping is defined as 2% of the critical damping for all modes. The
summary of results is shown in Figure 11.9, where two peaks corresponding to two resonant
frequencies can be seen.

FIGURE 11.7 The elbow pipe is installed on a shaker table. The table performs harmonic
oscillations relative to the base. The frequency of oscillations changes slowly from 0 Hz to
800 Hz.

Location of sensor

Shaker table

Base
© SAE International.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 11 Vibration Analysis 187

FIGURE 11.8 Four modes of vibration found in the frequency range 0-800 Hz.

Mode 1: 123 Hz Mode 2: 178 Hz


© SAE International.

Mode 3: 428 Hz Mode 4: 680 Hz

FIGURE 11.9 Result of Frequency Response Analysis; mode 1 and mode 3 are excited by
the oscillating base.

40

Mode 1: 123 Hz

30
Amplitude of displacement [mm]

20

10
Mode 3: 428 Hz
© SAE International.

0
0 200 400 600 800
Excitation frequency [Hz]
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

188 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

As shown in Figure 11.9, only two modes are excited by the vertical oscillations of the
table: mode 1 and mode 3. Mode 2 has the shape orthogonal to the direction of excitation;
mode 4 is a torsional mode; therefore, mode 2 and mode 4 are not excited by the vertical
oscillation of the shaker table.
When the excitation frequency passes through the natural frequency, the amplitude of
vibration reaches the local maximum. Vibration at the frequency of excitation equal to the natural
frequency is called resonance. The amplitude of vibration is then controlled only by damping.
The second example illustrates Frequency Response Analysis with a variable magnitude
of excitation. This is an analysis of a centrifuge where the magnitude of excitation force is
a square function of the excitation frequency. Such an excitation is called Omega Square
Excitation; it is a common type of excitation in rotating machinery.
Figure 11.10 shows a schematic model of an industrial centrifuge. The magnitude of the
out-of-balance centrifugal load is proportional to ω2, where ω is the angular velocity of the
drum in radians per second (rad/s). During the operation, the angular velocity changes in
the range 0–200 rad/s (0–35 Hz) and the force amplitude changes in the range 0–25000 N
(Figure 11.11). The Frequency Response Analysis is used to find the amplitude of displacement
of the centrifuge body as a function of the angular velocity of the drum.
The displacement response graph reveals one resonant frequency of 9.6 Hz corre-
sponding to the only mode of vibration in the excitation range of 0–35 Hz (Figure 11.12).

FIGURE 11.10 A centrifuge is subjected to a vertical oscillating load; the load magnitude is
proportional to ω2, where ω is the excitation frequency in rad/s. Guiderails, not shown in this
illustration, allow only for vertical movement of the centrifuge body. The body is supported
by four rubber legs. The body is very stiff compared to the legs. For simplicity, the excitation
force is applied to the top face (yellow) of the centrifuge body.

F = mew2 sin(wt)

© SAE International.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 11 Vibration Analysis 189

FIGURE 11.11 The magnitude of the excitation force is a square function of the excitation
frequency. The excitation frequency is the angular velocity of the drum. The curve equation is
F = meω2 where m = 5 kg is the out-of-balance mass; e = 0.1 m is the eccentricity and ω is the
angular velocity in rad/s.

25000

20000
Force amplitude [N]

15000

10000

5000
© SAE International.

0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35
Excitation frequency [Hz]

FIGURE 11.12 The magnitude of displacement of the centrifuge drum due to ω2 force
excitation in the range of the operating frequencies of 0-35 Hz.

9 Mode 1: 9.6 Hz
8
Displacement amplitude [mm]

1
© SAE International.

0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35
Excitation frequency [Hz]
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

190 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

11.4. N
 onlinear Vibration Analysis
Previously discussed Time Response and Frequency Response analyses belong to the class
of linear vibration analysis where the structure stiffness does not change with time (Time
Response) or with the frequency of excitation (Frequency Response). Being linear, these
analyses were based on the Modal Superposition Method leading to a very significant
reduction in the numerical effort required to obtain a solution. Most vibration problems
are linear, this is because displacements are small, and the material remains in the
linear range.
Analysis of nonlinear vibration problems where stiffness does change with time faces
two major challenges and both originate in the inability to use the Modal Superposition
Method. First, the equations of motion must be based on all DOFs in the model. Another
consequence of the inability to use the Modal Superposition Method is that modal damping
cannot be used. Damping in nonlinear problems is defined as Rayleigh damping. Rayleigh
damping makes an arbitrary assumption that the damping matrix is a linear combination
of the mass and stiffness matrices. This assumption is a mathematical convenience for the
purpose of simplification since there is no physical justification for this. Rayleigh damping
is specified by two damping constants: α and β, which are used as multipliers of the mass
matrix M and the stiffness matrix K when calculating damping matrix C:

C     M     K  (11.3)

Coefficients α and β are related to the frequency of excitation ω and the modal damping
coefficient ζ as shown in Equation 11.4.

 
  (11.4)
2 2

Alpha damping α is a viscous damping component also known as mass damping. It


characterizes damping at lower frequencies. Beta damping β is a hysteresis damping compo-
nent also known as stiffness damping. It characterizes damping at higher frequencies.
Nonlinear vibration analysis is conducted in the time domain. It is always Time
Response Analysis, and equations of motions are explicit functions of time. Examples of
nonlinear vibration analysis include dynamic contact between two bodies or oscillations
causing significant changes to the stiffness of the vibrating structure. A simple nonlinear
vibration problem is shown in Figure 11.13. A beam is held between two immovable hinges
and subjected to a uniformly distributed pressure of short duration and time-dependent
magnitude (Figure 11.14).
The source of nonlinearity in this problem is the membrane stresses which cause the
beam stiffness to increase during the process of deformation. A comparison between the
correct nonlinear solution and an incorrect linear solution is shown in Figure 11.15.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 11 Vibration Analysis 191

FIGURE 11.13 Beam held between two hinges and subjected to pressure is a classic
example of a nonlinear problem where nonlinearity is caused by the stress stiffening effect.
© SAE International.

FIGURE 11.14 Time history of pressure applied to the beam. Pressure follows a sine curve
reaching 0.5 MPa and then drops down to zero after 0.01 s.

0.6

0.5

0.4
Pressure [MPa]

0.3

0.2

0.1
© SAE International.

0
0.000 0.005 0.010 0.015 0.020

Time [s]
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

192 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 11.15 Displacement response in the mid-span of the beam in the correct
nonlinear solutions and an incorrect linear solution.

40

30

20
Displacement [mm]

10

0
0 0.04 0.08 0.12 0.16 0.2

–10

–20

–30

–40

© SAE International.
Time [s]

Nonlinear response Linear response

11.5. Hands-On Exercises


11.5.1. HAMMER - Impulse Load
Description
A cantilever beam with a mass at the end is subjected to a harmonic impulse load (Figure 11.3).
The load disappears after 0.1 s and the beam begins a free damped vibration.

Objective
Perform a Time Response Analysis and construct a displacement time-history graph of the
free end.

Procedure

•• Define the linear elastic material properties (Plain Carbon Steel).


•• Apply a fixed support as shown in Figure 11.2.
•• Apply a normal load uniformly distributed over the top face of the hammer head
with time history shown in Figure 11.3.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 11 Vibration Analysis 193

•• Define the sensor on the loaded face.


•• Run a modal analysis to find all modes in the range 0–800 Hz.
•• Specify all modes in the range 0–800 Hz to be used for the Modal Superposition
Method.
•• Apply 2% damping to all modes.
•• Mesh and run a Time Response Analysis for 5 s.
•• Construct a displacement time history in the sensor location for the duration of
the analysis (Figure 11.4).

Comments
Definition of Time Response Analysis includes specifying the time step; make sure it is
short enough to model response due to all modes in the 0–800 Hz range. Modal damping
is usually higher for higher modes. Therefore, applying the same modal damping to all
modes is a conservative approach resulting in a higher amplitude of displacement.

11.5.2. HAMMER - Beating


Description
Excitation coincident with the shape of the mode and with the frequency close to the natural
frequency produces a time response in the form of periodic amplification and cancelation
of vibration response (Figure 11.2).

Objective
Perform a Time Response Analysis of a model subjected to a harmonic load with the
frequency of excitation close to the first natural frequency. This demonstrates the phenom-
enon of beating.

Procedure
•• Define the material properties and restraints the same as in Exercise 11.5.1.
•• Mesh and run to find the first mode of vibration; verify that the frequency is 21 Hz.
•• Apply a normal load uniformly distributed over the top face of the hammer head
(Figure 11.2) with time history shown in Figure 11.5; the frequency of excitation is 19
Hz, and the amplitude is 10000 N.
•• Specify only one mode (the first mode of vibration) to be used in the Modal
Superposition Method.
•• Define a 0% modal damping (no damping).
•• Specify a small time step; 1/50 of the vibration period in the first mode.
•• Run a Time Response Analysis for 1 s.
•• Construct a displacement time history in the sensor location for the duration of
analysis (Figure 11.6).
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

194 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

Comments
Run the analysis again using excitation with a different frequency. Observe that when the
excitation frequency approaches the natural frequency, the beating period increases.

11.5.3. ELBOW PIPE


Description
This exercise models a “frequency sweep” test using a shaker table (Figure 11.7). This is a
commonly performed test in experimental vibration analysis. The analyzed object is
subjected to the base excitation with gradually increasing frequency. The vibration response
of the tested specimen is recorded as the frequency passes through the modal frequencies.

Objective
Perform a Frequency Response Analysis of a model subjected to a harmonic base excitation
with frequency in the range 0–800 Hz.

Procedure

•• Define the material properties of Gray Cast Iron.


•• Define the restraint to the flange to simulate support provided by the shaker table.
•• Define the sensor in the location shown in Figure 11.7.
•• Define the displacement base excitation in the direction normal to the flange face
(vertical direction in Figure 11.7) with a displacement amplitude of 1 mm.
•• Run a modal analysis to find all modes in the range 0–800 Hz.
•• Specify all modes in the frequency range 0–800 Hz to be used in the Modal
Superposition Method.
•• Apply 2% damping to all modes.
•• Mesh and run a Frequency Response Analysis in the range 0–800 Hz.
•• Construct a displacement amplitude graph in the sensor location for the excitation
range (Figure 11.9).
•• Expand this exercise to stress analysis; specify mesh bias in the locations of stress
concentrations.

Comments
The analysis uses part ELBOW PIPE, not the assembly model shown in Figure 11.7.

11.5.4. CENTRIFUGE
Description
The exercise simulates excitation caused by an out-of-balance load in the rotating drum.
The magnitude of excitation is proportional to ω2, where ω is the angular velocity in rad/s
(Figure 11.10).
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 11 Vibration Analysis 195

Objective
Perform a Frequency Response Analysis of a model subjected to ω2 square force excitation.

Procedure

•• Apply the material properties of Plain Carbon Steel to the centrifuge body.
•• Apply the material properties of Rubber to the four legs (E = 6.1 MPa, ν = 0.49,
ρ = 1000 kg/m3).
•• Define the sensor anywhere on the centrifuge body.
•• Define the fixed restraints to the bottom faces of the four rubber legs.
•• Define the slider restraints to the side faces of the centrifuge body to limit the
centrifuge movement to oscillations in the vertical direction.
•• Specify one mode to be used in the Modal Superposition Method.
•• Apply load to the centrifuge body in the vertical direction; the load is a function of
angular velocity as shown in Figure 11.11. You may use the table in the spreadsheet
CENTRIFUGE.xlsx.
•• Define a 5% modal damping.
•• Mesh and run a Frequency Response Analysis in the range 0–35 Hz.
•• Construct a displacement response graph as shown in Figure 11.12.

Comments
The rubber legs are small in comparison to the centrifuge body. Define mesh controls on
the legs to make sure that the elements are correctly shaped. Highly distorted elements will
model rubber leg stiffness incorrectly. The weight of centrifuge would deform the rubber
legs, but the effect of gravity is ignored in this exercise.

11.5.5. PLANK
Description
The plank is supported by two hinges, the distance between hinges does not change there-
fore, the beam develops membrane stresses while it deforms under the load (Figure 11.13).
Plank stiffness changes with deformation requiring a nonlinear geometry analysis.

Objective
Perform a nonlinear Time Response Analysis of a model subjected to an impact load.

Procedure

•• Apply the material properties of Alloy Steel.


•• Define a surface thickness of 25.4 mm.
•• Define a displacement sensor in the middle of the plank.
•• Define the hinge supports at the two short ends.
•• Define the time-dependent pressure (Figure 11.14).
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

196 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

•• Specify two modes to be used in the Modal Superposition Method.


•• Define damping as 5% for the first mode and 10% for the second mode.
•• Run a linear Time Response Analysis for 0.2 s.
•• Define Rayleigh damping with parameters: α = 20.17, β = 0.00012.
•• Run a nonlinear Time Response Analysis for 0.2 s.
•• Construct displacement response graphs to compare the results of linear and
nonlinear analyses (Figure 11.15).

Comments
The analysis uses part PLANK, not the assembly shown in Figure 11.13. Use a time step of
0.001 s, both in linear and nonlinear analyses.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

12
Thermal Analysis

T
hermal analysis with FEA deals with heat transfer in solid bodies. The primary
unknown in thermal analysis is temperature, which is a scalar entity. Therefore, only
one degree of freedom needs to be assigned to nodes, be it 3D, 2D, or 1D analysis.
This makes thermal analysis much simpler than structural analysis in terms of computa-
tional effort.
An important conceptual difference between structural and thermal analysis is that
while structural static analysis deals with the state of equilibrium under the applied load,
an analogous steady state thermal analysis does not describe a state of equilibrium. Instead,
it models a steady state condition where heat continues to flow, but temperatures do not
change in time. Therefore, the thermal analogy of a structural static analysis is a steady
state thermal analysis, and an analogy of a vibration (dynamic) structural analysis is a
transient thermal analysis. The temperature in thermal analysis is analogous to displace-
ment in structural analysis; selected analogies are shown in Table 12.1.
In every heat transfer problem, the mechanism of heat flow must be fully defined to
produce a unique temperature solution. An attempt to run thermal analysis without fully
defined heat flow conditions results in an error analogous to the absence of supports in
structural analysis.

© 2023 SAE International 199


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

200 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

TABLE 12.1 Analogies between structural and thermal analysis.

Structural analysis Thermal analysis


Displacement [m] Temperature [K]
Strain [1] Temperature gradient [K/m]
Stress [N/m2] Heat flux [W/m2]
Load [N] [N/m] [N/m2] [N/m3] Heat source [W] [W/m] [W/m2] [W/m3]
du dT
Hook’s law σ =E Fourier’s law q = −k
dx dx

12.1. H
 eat Flow by Conduction
Consider a model with different temperatures defined on two faces as shown in
Figure 12.1 .
Just like stress may be induced by prescribed displacement, heat flow may be induced
by a prescribed temperature. Heat flow in the bracket (Figure 12.1) is induced by the tempera-
ture gradient. No heat is exchanged through faces other than the two faces with prescribed
temperatures. The model is insulated, except for the two faces where prescribed temperatures

FIGURE 12.1 Temperature distribution in a model subjected to prescribed temperatures:


293 K to the top face and 393 K to the hole. The two faces where prescribed temperatures
are defined are the only faces where heat enters or exits the model.

Temp (Kelvin)
393K
393.0

384.7

376.3

368.0

359.7

351.3

343.0

334.7

326.3

318.0

309.7
© SAE International.

301.3

293.0
293K
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 12 Thermal Analysis 201

are defined. The only mechanism of heat transfer in the problem illustrated in Figure 12.1
is conduction in the solid body.

12.2. H
 eat Flow by Convection
Convection is modeled in FEA as a boundary condition. Convection boundary conditions
require the definition of the convection coefficient [W/m 2/K], and the temperature of the
surrounding fluid called the ambient temperature [K]. Heat transfer by convection takes
place between the face of the solid and the fluid in contact with the face where convection
boundary conditions are defined. Heat transfer by convection requires a moving fluid, it
cannot happen in a vacuum or when fluid is not moving. Fluid motion may be induced
by changes in the specific gravity of hot and cold fluid, this is called natural convection
and requires gravity. It may be also induced by the forced motion of fluid (e.g., a cooling
fan or a pump), this is called forced convection. Convection boundary conditions must
be defined on all faces participating in heat exchange between the solid and the
surrounding fluid.
Figure 12.2 presents a problem where heat is generated in a volume of a solid, this is
called heat power. Heat power may be defined as total heat power [W] or as heat power per
volume [W/m3]. Heat is removed from the model to the surrounding air by convection.
The steady state temperature in the microchip assembly model is shown in Figure 12.3.
Since this is a steady state thermal analysis, we do not know how long it has taken to reach
the steady state.
Figure 12.4 shows a problem that can be solved using a 2D representation, assuming
there is no temperature gradient along the length of the channel.
Temperature and heat flux in the channel are shown in Figure 12.5.

FIGURE 12.2 The bottom face of the microchip (blue) and the bottom face of the radiator
(green) are insulated. Heat generated in the microchip travels by conduction to the radiator,
and then it is dissipated by convection to the surrounding air. It is assumed that heat crosses
the border between the microchip and the radiator without encountering any resistance. Heat
transfer by conduction and by convection are present in this problem.

Radiator

Microchip
© SAE International.

Exploded view Collapsed view


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

202 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 12.3 Temperature in the assembly shows a hot spot in the microchip. The
temperature in the radiator shows a very low temperature gradient of 0.7 K.

Temp.K Temp.K
320.9 305.5
319.3 305.4
317.7 305.3
316.1 305.3
314.4 305.2
312.8 305.1
311.2 305.1
309.6 305.0
308.0 304.9

© SAE International.
306.4 304.9
304.8 304.8
Temperature in assembly Temperature in radiator

FIGURE 12.4 A long channel is heated at the bottom face. This is where the heat flux is
defined. Heat enters the model through the bottom face, travels through the solid body by
conduction, and escapes to the environment through faces where convection boundary
conditions are defined. Assuming that end faces on both sides are insulated, there is no
temperature gradient along the length of the channel. Therefore, the problem may be solved
using 2D representation.

© SAE International.

2D slice
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 12 Thermal Analysis 203

FIGURE 12.5 Heat flux plot using vector display. Arrows “coming out” of the walls
visualize heat escaping through the walls. This is enabled by the convection
boundary conditions.

Temp.K HFluxN (W/m2)


377 27814
376 25779
376 23745
375 21710
374 19675
373 17641
373 15606
372 13571
371 11536
370 9502
© SAE International.

369 7467
369 5432
368 3398
Temperature Heat flux

12.3. H
 eat Transfer by Radiation
Heat transfer by radiation is modeled in FEA as a boundary condition. Figure 12.6 shows a space
heater where three mechanisms of heat transfer are present: conduction, convection, and radiation.
Heat power is generated in the volume of the bulb. The heat is dissipated by radiation
to the ambient space, and some of it reaches the concave face of the reflector. A small portion
of the heat enters the reflector through the face touching the reflector. The emissivity of the

FIGURE 12.6 The outside faces of the bulb (red) and the concave side of the reflector
(magenta) are in a vacuum; they radiate heat out to the ambient space and exchange some
heat by radiation between themselves. The back face of the reflector and the rim (gray) are
exposed to air and dissipate heat by convection. We assume no radiation on the air side.
© SAE International.

Space heater model Section view


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

204 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 12.7 A section view of the steady state temperature in the space heater. Notice
the high temperature gradient in the bulb and low temperature gradient in the reflector.

Temp. (K)

885.6

837.5

789.4

741.3

693.2

645.1

597.0

548.9

500.8

452.7

404.6

© SAE International.
356.5

308.4

concave face of the reflector is low, but not zero; therefore, some heat, rather than being
reflected, enters the body of the radiator. Then it travels across the solid body and escapes
by convection to air on the convex side of the reflector. Heat exchange between two faces
with a radiation boundary condition depends on how those faces “see each other” and is
described by view factors.
To summarize, only heat transfer by conduction is modeled directly, radiation and
convection are modeled as boundary conditions. A steady state temperature plot in the
space heater is shown in Figure 12.7.

12.4. M
 odeling Considerations in Thermal
Analysis
Mirror symmetry boundary conditions can be used in thermal analysis with convection,
based on the observation that if symmetry exists in both geometry and boundary condi-
tions, then there is no heat flowing through the plane of symmetry. Therefore, after cutting
the model in half (Figure 12.8), nothing needs to be done to the faces created by the cuts.
No convection boundary conditions defined on the faces created by the cut automatically
enforce the symmetry of the heat flow.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 12 Thermal Analysis 205

FIGURE 12.8 The heat sink and microchip assembly may be cut in half. Do not define any
convection boundary conditions on the faces created by the cut, and the symmetry of heat
flow will be conserved.
© SAE International.

Full model with plane of symmetry 1/2 of the model

FIGURE 12.9 Model without fillets is not suitable for analysis of heat flux because sharp
reentrant edges produce heat flux singularity. Analysis of heat flux requires a detailed
modeling of geometry to include fillets even if they are very small.
© SAE International.

Simplified model without fillets Detailed model with fillets

The model shown in Figure 12.9 (left) has sharp reentrant edges. This model is suitable
for analysis of temperature but, because of sharp reentrant edges, it is not suitable for
analysis of heat flux in the vicinity of the sharp reentrant edges because of heat flux
singularity. This is in direct analogy to sharp reentrant edges causing stress singularities
in structural models.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

206 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

12.5. C
 hallenges in Thermal Analysis
Analogies between structural and thermal analyses make thermal analysis easy to learn;
one DOF per node makes thermal problems fast to solve. Still, it may be difficult to produce
meaningful results.
Thermal analysis with FEA is capable of modeling heat transfer in solid bodies only.
However, in the presence of fluids, heat transfer in solid bodies is accompanied by heat
exchange between the faces of solid bodies and the surrounding fluid. Modeling convective
heat transfer is a major problem because FEA cannot model fluid flow around a solid model,
and convection must be modeled as a boundary condition. The only difference between
natural and forced convection or between, for example, air and water surrounding a solid
body is a different value of convection coefficient and ambient temperature.
Meaningful results of thermal analysis with FEA require a correct definition of convec-
tion boundary conditions, but that is often difficult to find. An alternative to defining
convection as a boundary condition is solving a conjugate heat transfer problem that
includes fluid flow around the solid body. The conjugate heat transfer problem finds convec-
tion boundary conditions using flow simulation and transfers them to FEA. Many CAE
programs offer both FEA and Computational Fluid Dynamic (CFD) modules. CFD and
FEA may be interfaced as shown in Figure 12.10.
On a side note, we should point out an ambiguity in the common use of the terms CFD
and FEA. CFD refers to the field of application: the analysis of fluid motion. FEA refers to
a numerical method. Computational Fluid Dynamics problems are usually solved using
the Finite Volume Method. Heat flow in solids problems are usually solved with Finite
Element Method.

FIGURE 12.10 Solving a conjugate heat transfer problem is required if convection


boundary conditions are not known prior to thermal analysis with FEA. In a conjugate heat
transfer problem, heat flow is modeled in fluids and solids.

CFD Convection
Boundary
FEA
Conditions

© SAE International.
Finite Volume Finite Element
Method Method
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 12 Thermal Analysis 207

12.6. Hands-On Exercises


12.6.1. B
 RACKET04
Description
Heat flow is induced by prescribed temperatures applied to two faces (Figure 12.1). The
temperature solution does not depend on the material properties, but the amount of heat
transferred from the hot to the cold face does depend on the material properties.

Objective
Demonstrate thermal analysis with prescribed temperatures where conduction is the only
mechanism of heat transfer.

Procedure
•• Define any material properties.
•• Define prescribed temperatures as shown in Figure 12.1.
•• Mesh and solve.
•• Repeat the analysis for different material properties.
•• Analyze the temperature and heat flux results.

Comments
Notice that no heat escapes or enters the model through the walls other than the faces with
prescribed temperatures because no convection boundary conditions are defined.

12.6.2. H
 EAT SINK
Description
A ceramic microchip produces heat power in its volume (Figure 12.2). The heat travels by
conduction to the aluminum radiator, and then it escapes to the surrounding air
by convection.

Objective
Solve a thermal analysis problem with a heat source, conduction, and convection.

Procedure

•• Assign the material properties of aluminum to the radiator and ceramic porcelain
to the microchip. The conductivity of aluminum is 200 W/m/K and conductivity
of ceramic porcelain is 1.5 W/m/K.
•• Define the heat power of 10 W in the volume of the microchip.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

208 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

•• Define the convection boundary conditions on all outside faces of the radiator
except for the bottom face; convection coefficient at 50 W/m2/K and ambient (bulk)
temperature at 293 K.
•• Mesh, avoiding high turn angles in elements meshing round faces, and solve.
•• Analyze the temperature and heat flux results; use fringe plots for temperature and
vector plots for heat flux.

Comments
Repeat the exercise after deleting all convection boundary conditions. Observe that that
solution fails because heat cannot be removed from the model.

12.6.3. CHANNEL
Description
A long channel with no temperature gradient along the length may be reduced to a 2D
representation in close analogy to a 2D plane strain problem (Figure 12.4).

Objective
Demonstrate a 2D thermal analysis with heat power, conduction, and convection.

Procedure

•• Specify the 2D thermal analysis, this type of 2D representation is called “extruded.”


•• Define the material properties: Aluminum.
•• Define the heat power at 500 W to the bottom face; using 2D representation this is
applied to the bottom line of a 2D slice.
•• Define the convection boundary conditions on all other faces: convection coefficient
at 50 W/m2/K, ambient temperature at 300 K; using 2D representation this is applied
to all lines where the heat power is not defined.
•• Mesh and solve.
•• Analyze the plots of temperature distribution and heat flux; use vector plots for
heat flux.

Comments
This exercise may also be completed using a 3D model without 2D representation. Section
plots enable an analysis of heat flow inside the solid body. Section plots are frequently used
in thermal analysis. Vector plots are useful in visualizing heat flux results because heat flux
is a vector. Vector plots are frequently used in thermal analysis.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 12 Thermal Analysis 209

12.6.4. S
 PACE HEATER
Description
Heat power is produced in the volume of the hollow bulb (red) (Figure 12.6). The heat escapes
to the ambient space, some of it directly, and some first bounce off the face of the reflector.
Yet another portion of the heat enters the reflector body on the concave side and exits by
convection to the air on the convex side. Some heat travels directly to reflector through the
base of the bulb.

Objective
Demonstrate a heat transfer problem with conduction, radiation, and convection.

Procedure
•• Assign the material properties of aluminum to the reflector and glass to the bulb.
Thermal conductivity of aluminum at 200 W/m/K; thermal conductivity of glass
at 0.75 W/m/K.
•• Define the heat power 300 W to the volume of the bulb.
•• Define the convection boundary conditions on the back face of the reflector and on
the rim: convection coefficient at 50 W/m2/K and ambient temperature at 293 K.
•• Define the radiation boundary conditions on the outside faces of the bulb: emissivity
of 0.7, ambient temperature at 293 K.
•• Define the radiation boundary condition on the front (concave) face of the reflector:
emissivity of 0.1, ambient temperature at 293 K.
•• Mesh and solve.
•• Analyze the temperature distribution and heat flux results; use section plots for
temperature and vector plots for heat flux.

Comments
Emissivity compares the radiating surface to a black body whose emissivity is 1 and to a
perfectly reflective body whose emissivity is 0. Ambient temperature in a radiation boundary
condition is also called the temperature of a distant enclosure of a far-field temperature.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

13
Implementation of Finite
Element Analysis in
the Design Process

I
n this chapter we focus on the implementation issues: how to realize the full benefits of
FEA used as a design tool during product development process.

13.1. D
 ifferences between CAD and FEA
Geometry
The differences between CAD and FEA geometries are important issues encountered by
design engineers using FEA as a design tool. CAD geometry is a fully detailed geometry
of a part or an assembly; it contains all information necessary for manufacturing. Why is
FEA geometry different, why cannot we use manufacturing CAD geometry “as is” for FEA?
The reason is that geometry must be meshed prior to analysis. Further, the mesh must
be able to model the data of interest properly and must be of reasonable complexity suitable
for the solver. The requirements are summarized below:
•• CAD geometry: Must contain information necessary for manufacturing.
•• FEA geometry: Must be meshable; must allow for the creation of a mesh that will
correctly model the data of interest; must allow for the creation of a mesh solvable
within a reasonable time.

CAD geometry serves as a starting point in the process of preparation of an FE model


but is seldom usable without modifications. We will describe several actions performed on
the manufacturing CAD geometry in order to make it suitable for FEA.

© 2023 SAE International 211


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

212 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

13.1.1. D
 efeaturing
CAD geometry contains features necessary for manufacturing. Many of those features are
unimportant for analysis and should be removed prior to meshing (Figure 13.1). Leaving
such features results in an unnecessarily complicated mesh and in long solution times.
Worse, it may prevent the mesher from completing the mesh.
Decision on which features can be removed and which should be included in the finite
element model requires careful engineering judgment. A small size of a feature compared
to the overall size of the model does not automatically justify removing it. For example,
small fillets should be retained if the analysis objective is to find stresses where the fillets
are located. Defeaturing would create stress singularity (Figure 13.2). However, a fillet can
be removed if the objective of analysis are, for example, displacements or the stress in
another part of the structure far from the edges.
Defeaturing is done on solid CAD geometry. After defeaturing, the geometry remains
a solid geometry, eventually leading to a 3D solid element model. Defeaturing does not
change the type of geometry.

FIGURE 13.1 An example of a small feature of no structural importance. The feature


should be removed before meshing.

Remove

© SAE International.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 13 Implementation of Finite Element Analysis in the Design Process 213

FIGURE 13.2 Fillets (rounds) along internal edges are highlighted in red. The fillets cannot
be removed, no matter how small, if the analysis objective is to find stress along these edges.
© SAE International.

13.1.2. Idealization
Idealization modifies CAD geometry more substantially than defeaturing. For example,
idealization may require converting 3D solid geometry into a surface geometry suitable for
meshing with shell elements (Figure 13.3) or into a wireframe geometry suitable for meshing
with beam elements (Figure 13.4). At times idealization leads to an analysis of reduced
dimensionality, as in the case of the vase in Figure 13.5. In all these cases geometry is not just
simplified to facilitate meshing. It is converted into an abstract geometry suitable exclusively
for analysis. Often, solid CAD geometry cannot be converted into an idealized FEA geometry,
and the idealized geometry must be constructed solely for the purpose of FEA.

FIGURE 13.3 A solid model of a stamped steel pulley is converted into a surface
geometry for meshing with shell elements.
© SAE International.

Solid geometry Surface geometry


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

214 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 13.4 A solid model of a cage (left) is converted into a wireframe geometry for
meshing with beam elements.

© SAE International.
Solid geometry Wireframe geometry

FIGURE 13.5 A solid model of a vase is used to prepare a 2D slice and mesh it with 2D
axisymmetric elements.

© SAE International.

Solid geometry 2D radial slice

13.1.3. Cleanup
An ambivalent term “geometry cleanup” refers to geometry quality issues that must be dealt
with to enable meshing. Sometimes, geometry that is satisfactory for manufacturing
purposes contains features that will not mesh or will force the mesher to create an excessively
large number of elements. Examples are very short edges or faces, as illustrated in Figures
13.6 –13.8. Those minuscule features have no importance for analysis and must be removed.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 13 Implementation of Finite Element Analysis in the Design Process 215

FIGURE 13.6 A sliver face created by a geometry modeling error. It must be removed to
enable meshing.
© SAE International.

Location of the Fragment showing


sliver face the sliver face

FIGURE 13.7 This geometry requires both defeaturing by removing the chamfer (green)
and cleanup, as shown in Figure 13.8.
© SAE International.

Mesh creation may also fail because of geometry quality issues like coincident entities,
floating solids, and other problems that can be detected by CAD quality control tools.
Meshing places high-quality requirements on CAD geometry, and meshing can double
as a CAD geometry quality inspection. Therefore, mesh creation may be thought of as a
geometry quality test worthwhile performing even if no FEA is intended. Usually, geometry
cleanup intended to facilitate meshing also results in a better manufacturing geometry.
Geometry cleanup may be combined with defeaturing or may precede geometry idealization.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

216 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 13.8 The minuscule face (red) should be removed prior to meshing.

© SAE International.
13.2. Common Meshing Problems
The tasks described previously: defeaturing, idealization, and cleanup, have one common
goal: to produce geometry that captures all important features of the analyzed structure
and, at the same time, is meshable into a correct, and preferably simple, finite
element mesh.
Even though meshing is an automated process, it is not a hands-off process. User’s
input is still required to control the element type and order, element size, and mesh bias.
Creating a mesh can be looked at as a process of filling up a volume or surface with
primitives of certain shape. Solid elements can be tetrahedrons, wedges, and hexahedrons.
We will sketch out the mesh quality issues using a tetrahedral element as an example. Since
it is not possible to represent an arbitrary geometry with regular tetrahedrons of the same
size, elements in the mesh are scaled and distorted. The resulting mesh can be thought of
as an assembly of tetrahedrons in various sizes and with various degrees of distortion.
While elements are always distorted in the process of mapping to geometry, excessive
distortion leads to element degeneration as described in Chapter 5. Complex CAD geometry
invariably contains portions that are “difficult” to mesh with properly shaped elements.
Those portions often end up being represented with highly distorted elements. The same
“difficult” portions of model geometry often coincide with areas of high stress, but highly
distorted elements are unable to produce correct results.
Excessive mesh distortion can be prevented by controlling the default element size or
by applying local mesh controls. Most FEA programs offer tools to check mesh quality. The
aspect ratio check is shown in Figure 13.9; curvature distortion, called here the Jacobian
ratio, is shown in Figure 13.10.
Sometimes, geometry makes it impossible to avoid excessively distorted elements
without modifying the geometry (Figure 13.11).
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 13 Implementation of Finite Element Analysis in the Design Process 217

FIGURE 13.9 Aspect ratio plots. Poorly shaped elements are created in thin portions of
the model; elements there have the highest aspect ratio. The range of the aspect ratio in the
mesh with large elements is 1.1–13.0. The range of aspect ratio in the mesh with small
elements is 1.0–3.8. The aspect ratio for a regular tetrahedron is 1.

Aspect ratio Aspect ratio


13.0 3.8
11.8 3.5
10.7 3.3
9.5 3.0
8.3 2.7
7.1 2.4
5.9 2.1
4.7 1.9
© SAE International.

3.5 1.6
2.3 1.3
1.1 1.0
Large elements Small elements
Range of aspect ratio 1.1-13.0 Range of aspect ratio 1.0-3.8

FIGURE 13.10 Jacobian ratio plots. Using large elements to mesh curvilinear geometry
leads to excessive curvature distortion. The range of the Jacobian ratio in the mesh with large
elements is 1.0–1.55. The range of the Jacobian ratio in the mesh with small elements is
1.0–1.21. The Jacobian ratio for an element with all straight edges is 1.

Jacobian ratio Jacobian ratio


1.55 1.21
1.50 1.19
1.44 1.17
1.39 1.15
1.33 1.13
1.28 1.10
1.22 1.08
1.17 1.06
© SAE International.

1.11 1.04
1.06 1.02
1.00 1.00
Large elements Small elements
Range of Jacobian ratio 1.0-1.55 Range of Jacobian ratio 1.0-1.21

FIGURE 13.11 Because of tangent faces, meshing this geometry produces poorly shaped
elements with high aspect ratio.

Aspect ratio
17.3
15.6
14.0
12.4
10.8
9.2
7.5
© SAE International.

5.9
4.3
2.7
1.0
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

218 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

Even though we use solid elements to discuss meshing problems, similar meshing
considerations apply to shell and beam elements. In the case of shell elements, element
distortion applies to the element shape and the element warpage.

13.3. Mesh Adequacy


Even if finite element mesh is free from excessive distortions, it does not mean it is for
certain a good mesh. While elements may be correctly shaped, the number of elements
combined with the element order may be unable to represent the pattern of data of interest
like stresses or displacements. As opposed to the element distortion which can be controlled
by mesh quality tools, the mesh adequacy can be only assessed based on an understanding
of the modeled problem. No software check will warn against using an incorrect mesh
shown in Figure 13.12.

FIGURE 13.12 All first order elements are correctly shaped but the mesh is incapable of
modeling bending, which is the primary mechanism of load transfer in this structure. Several
layers of the first order elements would be required to model bending stresses properly. The
second, or higher order elements should be used.
Sharp reentrant edges cause stress singularity. This is a modeling error and not related
to the element order or other meshing issues. The correct second order element mesh has
two layers of the second order elements; stress singularities are eliminated by modeling rounds.

© SAE International.
Incorrect mesh with first order elements Correct mesh with second order elements
and local refinement in fillets
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 13 Implementation of Finite Element Analysis in the Design Process 219

13.4. Integration of CAD and FEA


Programs
Concurrent use of CAD and FEA software during the product development process means
that information is frequently exchanged between these two applications. This invariably
brings up the issue of the desired level of integration between CAD and FEA software.

13.4.1. Stand-Alone FEA Programs


Commercial FEA programs started as stand-alone applications before CAD became
available. Early FEA programs included rudimentary, by today’s standards, tools for
geometry creation, adequate for creating and editing simple 2D and 3D models. The 3D
solid CAD became available in the 1990s and offered more powerful geometry creation
tools than those included in the early FEA software, making it possible to use CAD for the
preparation of FEA models. Geometry could be exchanged between CAD and FEA software
utilizing neutral file formats like IGES, STEP, any many others. Later, direct interfaces
enabled FEA programs to read geometry data directly from CAD models.

13.4.2. FEA Programs Integrated with CAD


FEA program intended as a tool for the design engineer should be integrated with CAD
for efficient exchange of information between design and analysis. In an FEA program
integrated with CAD, all geometry creation and editing is done in CAD. If analysis-specific
geometry needs to be derived from the CAD geometry by defeaturing and/or idealization,
CAD offers the ability to switch between manufacturing and analysis representations by
feature suppression, automatic creation of midplane surfaces for shell element meshing,
etc. In the FEA portion of the integrated CAD-FEA system, the user defines the type of
analysis; assigns material properties (material properties can be also defined in CAD and
then transferred to FEA), loads, and supports; and creates a mesh.
An integrated CAD-FEA program must reach a balance between relieving users
from FEA-specific tasks like manual meshing and still allowing for control over
FEA-specific tasks. Since the state of the art of FEA software does not yet allow to
move meshing into the background and avoid any user’s intervention, users should
be given control over issues like mesh controls and element order. The software should
also offer mesh quality checks and a choice of solution method most suitable for the
analyzed problem.

13.4.3. C
 omputer Aided Engineering (CAE)
Programs
Modern CAE programs feature different engineering applications integrated with CAD in
such a way that information can be exchanged both ways between an application and CAD
and between applications themselves. (Figure 13.13). The list of CAE applications integrated
with CAD keeps expanding with the progress in CAE tools.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

220 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 13.13 Selected integrated CAE tools available to design engineers.

FEA

CAD

© SAE International.
MOTION
CFD
ANALYSIS

13.5. FEA Implementation


13.5.1. Positioning of CAD and FEA Activities
FEA should be used concurrently with the design process, and results produced by FEA
should be used to make design decisions. This concurrent CAD-FEA process (Figure 13.14,
left) proceeds in manufacturing-specific geometry and FEA proceeds in FEA-specific
geometry. Every time FEA is used, the interface line is crossed twice: first time when
modifying CAD geometry to make it suitable for analysis with FEA and the second time
when making design modifications based on FEA results. This significant interfacing effort
may be avoided if, recognizing the differences between CAD and FEA geometries, a new
design is started and iterated in the FEA-specific geometry. Only after several iterations,
the transfer is made to CAD geometry by adding manufacturing-specific features. This way
the interfacing effort is reduced to just one switch from FEA to CAD geometry (Figure 13.14).
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 13 Implementation of Finite Element Analysis in the Design Process 221

FIGURE 13.14 Concurrent CAD-FEA design process and FEA-driven design process.

MANUFACTURING FEA MANUFACTURING FEA


GEOMETRY GEOMETRY GEOMETRY GEOMETRY

Design Design

Design Analysis Analysis

Design Analysis Analysis

Design Design
© SAE International.

Concurrent design-FEA design process FEA driven design process

13.5.2. Personnel Training


How should we divide the analysis responsibilities between design engineers and analysts?
Analysis used to be an exclusive domain of analysts but, in recent years, that has been
changing in favor of design engineers. Experience indicates that design engineers, if
provided with modern FEA program and training, are best positioned to analyze their
design while it progresses through design iterations. The direct involvement of design
engineers in the analysis assures that analysis results are correctly implemented into the
design in progress. While traditionally drafting, designing and analysis were separate tasks
executed by different people; the availability and power of both CAD and FEA programs,
along with competitive pressures, extended the responsibilities of design engineers first to
geometry creation in CAD and then to design analysis (Figure 13.15).
Even though we focus on FEA, the above applies to other CAE applications, not only
to FEA.
The essential differences between FEA run by design engineers and analysts are
summarized in Table 13.1.
How should design engineers prepare for the added analysis responsibilities? Most of
what design engineers need to know about the FEA is already well within their engineering
background because undergraduate mechanical engineering programs include courses in
FEA. Training in FEA does not require an introduction to new engineering knowledge or
concepts. Instead, topics from known subjects like machine design, mechanics of materials,
vibrations, and heat transfer need to be presented through their applicability to FEA. If
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

222 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 13.15 Increasing responsibilities of design engineers coming with the


implementation of CAE tools into the design process.

ANALYSIS

DESIGN DESIGN CAD ANALYSIS

Design DRAFTING

© SAE International.
Design
Engineer Engineer

Past Present

TABLE 13.1 Differences between FEA performed by a design engineer and by an analyst.

Design engineer Analyst


Background Design engineering Design analysis
Type of analysis Linear static Strongly nonlinear
Nonlinear static Transient thermal
Modal Vibration
Buckling Optimization
Steady state thermal
Degree of idealization of CAD Analysis done on geometry Extensive idealization
geometry derived from CAD models with
few modifications
Mode of analysis Concurrent with the design “Off-line”
process

both CAD and FEA programs satisfy the requirements discussed in the next chapter, the
FEA training required to start a productive work is easy to complete.
The key issue in FEA training is providing users with conceptual understanding of
FEA fundamentals: major assumptions, limitations, inherent errors as well as common
mistakes, traps, and misconceptions. The training course should include hands-on exercises
for participants to benefit from the synergy between acquiring software skills and
familiarization with the FEA background at the same time. Meaningful examples illustrating
both FEA theory and software capabilities can be solved after a short introduction to the
FEA background and a quick introduction to the software. Geometry should be prepared
in advance, so no time is wasted on CAD-specific tasks. The progressive familiarity with
software should be worked into examples of increasing complexity. While extensive
theoretical treatment is not required, a simplistic approach should also be avoided. A balance
must be reached between the FEA theory and software-specific functions because too much
focus on “how to run software” may overshadow important issues of FEA fundamentals.
It may also give a false impression that familiarity with the program equals expertise in
FEA. Users who know the fundamentals of FEA can easily learn the software, but skills in
operating the software do not lead to a full understanding of FEA. After basic training,
users should be given an opportunity to try out their skills on simple projects under the
guidance of an experienced FEA user before more advanced training commences.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 13 Implementation of Finite Element Analysis in the Design Process 223

The highlights of FEA training for a design engineer are summarized below:
•• Focus on conceptual understanding of FEA.
•• Make it hands-on with examples of progressing complexity.
•• Have examples prepared in the form of CAD models.
•• Combine theory with hands-on examples.
•• Use integrated CAD-FEA software.
•• Stress out that CAD and FEA are different applications.
•• Follow up with a more advanced training.
A basic training should be provided to all personnel who is not involved with FEA
directly but supervise design engineers, request analysis, interpret and implement FEA
results, etc. Training may be conducted in face-to-face format or as a webinar. In the author’s
opinion, none presents significant advantages over the other.

13.5.3. FEA Program Selection


Considering that many different FEA programs are available on the market, how do
we choose the best one to use as a design tool? Which one will bring the best return on
investment when implemented in the design process? We will point out several issues to
consider when selecting FEA software.
•• Interface between FEA and CAD.
CAD and FEA need to be used side by side in the product design process: CAD
for creating the geometry of a new design and FEA for analyzing it. We cannot
select the FEA program without considering which CAD program is used. It is
possible to exchange information between CAD and FEA through neutral formats
like IGES, STEP, and others; this method of communication is time consuming,
prone to errors, and offers no associativity between CAD and FEA geometry. A
direct interface where FEA software can read a CAD file directly is better but still
requires maintaining two separate databases: one for the CAD model and the
other one for the FEA model. To maximize the benefits of FEA used as a design
tool, the FEA program needs to be integrated with CAD in such a way that FEA
may be executed without leaving the CAD program. The success of an integrated
CAD-FEA system depends on both the capabilities of CAD and FEA modules.
The integrated CAD-FEA duo works well only if solid, parametric, feature-based
CAD software is used. Using this type of CAD, geometric features can be tempo-
rarily suppressed without permanently deleting them and different design configu-
rations can be examined by taking advantage of the parametric formulation of
the CAD model. CAD should be able to prepare an analysis-specific configuration,
create meshable geometry, and assign material properties while the rest of the
FEA model definition (type of analysis, loads, restraints, mesh), solution, and
analysis of results should be handled by the FEA part of the CAD-FEA team. This
not only allows for quick CAD-FEA iterations; it also reduces FEA training time
since all geometry-related functions are performed using the already familiar
CAD rather than by the FEA program.
•• The FEA program should be easy to use, but the user should still be able to control it.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

224 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

The FEA-specific tasks should not be hidden from users. Therefore, the FEA software
should offer control over meshing, type and order of elements, idealization scheme,
and the desired solution method. While default choices offered by advanced FEA
programs are often acceptable, the user should be able to control FEA-specific tasks,
if such an intervention is required.
•• FEA software should have a good mesher and fast solver.
The quality of FE mesh is essential in producing good quality FEA results, and a fast
solver is important to produce those results in a timely manner. A good mesher and fast
solver reduce the efforts spent on geometry preparation because even large CAD models
mesh and solve fast, providing results quick enough to keep up with the design process.
•• The FEA program should handle common types of analyses.
Analysis problems solved concurrently with the design process include the following
types of analyses:
■■ Linear static analysis
■■ Nonlinear large displacements analysis
■■ Nonlinear material analysis (simple types of nonlinear material models)
■■ Contact stress analysis
■■ Modal analysis
■■ Linear buckling analysis
■■ Steady state thermal analysis
The selected FEA program should support these types of analyses while more advanced
capabilities are optional. Chances are that occasional projects requiring advanced types of
analysis either will be too complex or data will not be available to execute the analysis
concurrently with the design process. It is best to hand over those complex projects to
analysts. To facilitate data exchange between the design engineer and analyst, the selected
FEA software should ideally be a subset of a larger FEA program. If a more advanced analysis
becomes necessary, models prepared by the design engineer can be forwarded to the analyst
without the need for geometry reconstruction or translation.
•• FEA program should have good presentation tools.
The FEA program should incorporate tools to communicate the design intent to
the rest of the organization. Results should be accessible to anybody with standard
office software, without having to use the FEA program. Presentation tools form a
very important part of the FEA program.
•• FEA program expertise should be available to users.
The process of selection of an FEA program, should include the check of the avail-
ability of expertise starting from on-line help, through hotline support, to users’
groups and consultants independent of the program developers and vendors. The
software vendor should not be the sole source of expertise in the chosen FEA program.
•• Cost of FEA program.
Finally, the FEA program should not be costly, either in terms licensing cost, cost
of implementation, or training. However, the cost alone should not be the first
consideration. The cost of buying an inappropriate program far outweighs savings
realized on the purchase price.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 13 Implementation of Finite Element Analysis in the Design Process 225

Let us summarize the requirements placed on FEA as well as on CAD programs.


CAD system should:
•• Be solid, parametric, feature based.
•• Be able to create all geometry in both CAD-specific and FEA-specific configurations.
•• Offer quick alternations between those two geometries while keeping them linked.
•• Be able to send geometry and material properties data to the FEA program.
FEA system should:
•• Be integrated with CAD.
•• Support common CAD exchange formats in case if data comes from a different
CAD.
•• Have an advanced mesher with provision for user’s control and fast solvers.
•• Be scalable to the top-end “analyst style” FEA.
•• Offer tools for communicating with the rest of the organization.
•• Have good users’ support.

13.5.4. H
 ardware Selection
In the 1990s the Windows® Operating System has displaced other operating systems used
in engineering applications. Since then, hardware selection has become a secondary issue
as compared to software selection. Generally, any computer capable of running solid,
parametric, feature-based CAD is also adequate to run FEA programs. Factors to consider
include the amount of RAM memory, capacity of storage devices, and graphics card certi-
fied for use with the CAD program.

13.5.5. Building Confidence in FEA


Having acquired the appropriate FEA program and hardware and having provided the
users with training, we need to demonstrate the usefulness of FEA to the rest of the orga-
nization. This is best done in steps:
•• Analyze the successful designs now in production to establish the modeling approach
and safety factors.
•• Validate each FEA project with testing and field results.
•• Modify the modeling approach, if necessary.
•• Add the validated projects to the database.
•• Keep track of the cost associated with the FEA and compare it with traditional
design methods.

Building confidence in FEA requires that results be validated using analytical or


experimental methods. Some of those experimental methods, along with their advantages
and disadvantages, are summarized in Table 13.2.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

226 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

TABLE 13.2 A partial list of methods available for validating results of stress analysis
with FEA.
Experimental method Advantages Disadvantages
Strain gauge Real loads, real structure, Provides only point information
reliable stress information
Photoelasticity Provides field information Expensive and time consuming;
similitude rules difficult to satisfy
Mostly of historical importance
Stress coating Real loads, real structure, Good for qualitative information only,
relatively easy to apply quantitative results are unreliable
Brittle coating Easy to use, fast Limited to qualitative analysis
Results of laboratory/field Reliable results Testing requires a prototype that is not
tests yet available
Results of previous similar Quick to assess relative Link to reality is still unknown if the
FEA improvement between two first FEA was not validated
models

13.5.6. R
 eturn on Investment
The actual return on investment depends on several factors that we have already discussed:
what CAD and FEA programs are used, how is FEA implemented in the design process,
and how well the FEA users have been trained. Experience indicates that the cost of the
FEA program and training can be recovered in a single implementation of FEA. Based on
the author’s experience in the field of automotive engineering, the cost of prototyping and
testing a simple part like an engine bracket, pulley, or door hardware can easily run some-
where between $10,000 and $50,000, taking several weeks to complete. This compares to
the cost of an FEA program in the range of $4,000–$10,000 plus $2,000 to $4,000 for training.
Even more importantly, results can be produced in a matter of hours as opposed to the days
or weeks required for prototyping and testing. The direct cost comparison is even more in
favor of FEA and against the traditional prototyping and testing approach if more complex
parts are analyzed. For complex parts the combined cost of prototyping and testing of one
design easily runs into hundreds of thousands of dollars and takes several months to
complete. The cost comparison still does not account for savings from reduced warranty
costs and improved overall product quality. The ROI will certainly differ in each individual
case, and it might be easier to talk about losses caused by not using correctly implemented FEA.

13.6. FEA Project


We will now discuss the steps in the FEA project from the managerial point of view. While
previously described steps—creating a mathematical model, creating the FEA model,
solution, and analysis of results—still apply, they must be appended by a justification of
analysis before any activity starts and implementation of results once the analysis has been
completed. The following applies to structural analysis projects but may be expanded to
other types of analyses.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 13 Implementation of Finite Element Analysis in the Design Process 227

13.6.1. B
 efore FEA Project Starts
Answering the following questions will help in a successful execution of an FEA project:
•• Do I really need FEA?
This is the most fundamental question to address before any analysis starts. FEA
consumes significant resources, and each use should be justified. Providing answers
to the following questions may help to decide if FEA should be executed.
•• Can I use previous test results or previous FEA results?
•• Is this a standard design so no analysis is necessary?
•• Are loads, restraints, and material properties known well enough to make FEA
worthwhile?
•• Would a simplified analytical model do?
•• Does my customer demand the FEA?
•• What shall I do with the results of the FEA?
•• Should the analysis be done in-house or should it be contracted out?
•• Conducting analysis in-house and using consultants both have advantages and
disadvantages. Consultants may produce results faster while in-house analysis is
conducive to establishing company expertise leading to long-term savings.
•• How fast do I need to produce results?
•• Do I have enough time and resources to do a complete FEA before design decisions
must be made?

13.6.2. E
 stablish the Scope of Analysis
The following questions help in defining the scope of analysis:
•• Is this a standard analysis of a new product from an established product line?
•• Is this the last check of a production-ready new design before the final testing?
•• Is this a quick check of a design in progress to assist the designer?
•• Is this an aid to the R&D project (detail of a design, gauge, fixture, etc.)?
•• Is this conceptual analysis to support a design at an early stage of development
(R&D project)?
•• What is an estimated number of model iterations, load cases, etc.?
•• How should I analyze the results? What are the evaluation criteria and safety factors?
•• How will I know whether the results can be trusted?

13.6.3. C
 reate the Mathematical Model
Having established the scope of analysis, the modeling begins. The best model is the
simplest one that still provides the required results with acceptable accuracy. Therefore,
the mathematical model should be as simple as possible to minimize project cost and
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

228 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

duration, yet it should account for the essential characteristics of the analyzed object.
We need to decide on the acceptable defeaturing and/or idealization. The goal is to produce
a meshable geometry properly representing the analyzed problem. Decisions on using
2D representation may have to be made. Loads and restraints must be formulated in
accordance with the type of performed analysis. For example, vibration analysis requires
loads and/or supports defined as a function of time. Large deformation analysis requires
defining loads as following or non-following, etc. Material properties must be defined in
accordance with the type of analysis.

13.6.4. C
 reate the Finite Element Model and Solve It
The Finite Element model is created by discretization of a mathematical model; this is
commonly called meshing. Although the term “meshing” implies that only geometry is
discretized, the discretization also affects loads and restraints. Meshing and solution are
largely automated steps but still require the user’s input. Creating a finite element model
based on the accepted mathematical model includes decisions on:
•• Element type to be used
•• Element size and size tolerance
•• Mesh controls (if any)
•• Type of mesher to be used
•• Type of load control
•• Type of solver to be used

13.6.5. R
 eview the Results
FEA results must be critically reviewed prior to using them to make design decisions. This
includes review of assumptions and assessment of the results. This is an iterative step that
may require several loops to debug the FEA model and establish confidence in the results.
Review of results include:
•• Study of animated displacements.
•• Check overall stress levels (order of magnitude) using analytical methods to verify
the applied loads.
•• Check reactions and compare them to reactions found using free body diagrams.
•• Conduct convergence process and review discretization errors.
•• Analyze stress concentrations and the ability of mesh to model them properly.
•• Review results in difficult-to-model locations like thin walls and stress
concentrations.
•• Investigate the impact of element distortions on the data of interest.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 13 Implementation of Finite Element Analysis in the Design Process 229

13.6.6. P
 resentation of the Results
The exact execution of this step depends on the objective of the analysis. In all cases however,
results should be presented in a way suitable for using them to make a design decision.
Analysis of results includes the following steps:
•• Present displacement results.
•• Present modal frequencies and associated modes of vibration (if applicable).
•• Present stress results and corresponding factors of safety.
•• Propose modifications to the analyzed structure to eliminate excessive stresses to
improve material utilization and manufacturability.
•• Discuss results and repeat iterations until the acceptable solution is found.
Management of the FEA project requires the manager’s involvement during project
execution. The correctness of FEA results cannot be established only by a review of the
results. Involvement during the project progress helps managers to keep in the loop and
improve communication with the person performing the analysis. Several checkpoints are
suggested in Figure 13.16.

FIGURE 13.16 Checkpoints in an FEA project; the project is allowed to proceed after each
step has been approved by the manager.

Do you really need FEA?

Modeling approach OK?

Geometry OK?

Loads, restraints OK?

Mesh OK?
© SAE International.

Results OK?
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

230 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

13.6.7. FEA Report


Even though each FEA project is unique, the structure of most FEA reports follows similar
patterns. Reports should be self-explanatory and contain all information necessary to
analyze results and recreate results, should that become necessary. The following are the
main components of an FEA report:
•• Executive summary
Objective of the project, part number, project number, essential assumptions, results
and conclusions, program used (including program release), and information on
where backups are stored.
•• Introduction
Describe the problem: Why did it require FEA? What kind of analysis is that: static,
contact stress, vibration analysis, etc.? What are the data of interest?
•• Description of loads and restraints
Describe loads and restraints, include free body diagrams, and discuss any simpli-
fications and assumptions. Discuss methods of load control, etc.
•• Description of model geometry
Describe the model geometry and how it was created: from CAD geometry (in
integrated CAD-FEA software, from CAD through an interface); describe and
justify any geometry cleanup, defeaturing, and idealization; justify the modeling
approach such as solids, shells, beams, or 2D.
•• Description of meshing and control of the discretization error
Describe the type of elements, global element size, any mesh control applied, the
number of elements, the number of DOFs, the type of mesher used, and the type of
solver used. Justify why the mesh is adequate to model the data of interest. Describe
the method used to control discretization error (mesh refinement, h adaptive or p
adaptive solution, etc.).
•• Analysis of results
Present displacement and stress results including plots and animations. Justify the
stress measure used to present results (max. principal stress, von Mises stress, …).
Discuss errors in the results; present applicable safety factors.
•• Conclusions
Make recommendations regarding structural integrity, necessary modifica-
tions, and further study needed. Recommend the testing procedure (e.g.,
strain-gauge test, fatigue life test). Make a recommendation regarding future
similar designs.
•• Project documentation
Building in-house expertise requires good documentation of each project besides
the project report itself. Therefore, significant time should be allowed to prepare
project documentation, which should be self-explanatory and complete with all
backups for easy recreations of results.
•• Follow-up
After the tests were completed, a report should be appended with test results. An
analysis of the correlation between FEA results and test results should be presented,
and corrective action taken in the case where the correlation is unsatisfactory. The
corrective action may consist of analysis of a revised model or a physical test.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 13 Implementation of Finite Element Analysis in the Design Process 231

13.6.8. P
 roject Documentation and Backups
All FEA-related documents should be subjected to applicable document quality standards.
FEA reports and backups can be used for:
•• Audit of the work performed
•• Restart of the work
•• Basis for execution of modified analyses
•• Basis for personnel training
•• Establishing in-house expertise in FEA
•• Legal documents when liability is involved
A comprehensive project documentation, complete with backups and all additional
documentation, is the major building block in the process of accumulating and retaining
in-house FEA expertise. The project documentation should be sufficient to recreate the
results or run a modified analysis without any need for verbal communications. Without
proper project documentation, expertise gained in the project may be lost.

13.6.9. Contracting Out FEA Services


•• When FEA services are contracted out, the hired consultant does not necessarily
become the analyst. As many as three parties may be involved when an FEA project
is contracted out: In-house analyst who formulates the problem, prepares data, and
analyzes the final results.
•• In-house manager who assumes responsibilities for the project.
•• Consultant who participates in selecting the modeling approach, runs the analysis,
and presents results to the in-house design engineer or analyst.

Project definition must be specific; client and consultant should know exactly what
needs to be done. The in-house design engineer analyst should approve each step: type of
analysis, definition of loads, restraints, mesh creation, result analysis, conclusions. It is
advisable to get a warranty in case if results do not correlate with experimental data. Each
FEA project, even if contracted out, should contribute to in-house experience in FEA. The
main steps in contracted-out FEA projects are shown in Figure 13.17. A project that is
contracted out still requires significant involvement of the requestor, and client-consultant
communication must be open at all times.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

232 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

FIGURE 13.17 The main steps in a contracted-out FEA project.

Why FEA? Interaction with consultant


Alternatives to FEA Project monitoring
Benefits Project management
Cost

Defining scope of analysis


Project completion
Our input
Deliverables OK?
Expected results
Cost and time OK?
Timing

Finding consultant
Request for quotes Implementation of results
Technical expertise Follow up by consultant
Prevoiusly completed projects In-house follow-up
Time and cost

© SAE International.
Assessment of quotes Accumlating in-house expertise
Understanding the quotes Project documentation
Work scope Leassong learned
Warranty FEA Archive

13.6.10. C
 ommon Errors in Management of FEA
Projects
FEA projects are often challenging, and management errors are easily made. Below is a
sample of common errors with short comments. This is not an “all inclusive” list and is
intended only to highlight some frequently encountered problems.
•• “Please do FEA”
Project objectives are not clearly defined, neither the manager nor the person
performing FEA knows exactly what the project objectives and expected benefits are.
•• Too high expectations placed on FEA
FEA results are viewed as an assurance of a sound design.
•• No time limits
The project is allowed to take as much time as the person performing FEA wishes
to take.
•• “We do FEA on everything”
FEA is done on models that could be analyzed with less-expensive methods.
•• Proficiency in software confused with expertise in FEA
Skills in using the FEA program are taken as proof of expertise in FEA.
•• Confusing CAD and FEA
The same measures are applied to CAD and FEA projects and personnel.
•• Not enough time allowed for training in FEA
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 13 Implementation of Finite Element Analysis in the Design Process 233

Training in FEA is reduced to training in using FEA software.


•• Not enough time allowed for documentation
Due to time pressure, projects are not documented properly. Without a comprehen-
sive report, good backup, and full documentation, corporate expertise gained in
the project is lost.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

14
Summary

14.1. FEA Quiz


Here is a sample of statements and questions circulating in the FEA community, many of
them reflect common misconceptions. All quotes are not edited, and in many cases, state-
ments are formulated imprecisely, just the way they were posed. All are listed in random
order and the same topics occur in more than one question. An FEA quiz is followed by
frequently asked questions.
1. The finer the mesh is, the better are your results: true/false?
Usually true, if “better results” means more “accurate results” in terms of a lower
discretization error. Finer meshes are more expensive, so a compromise should
be reached between accuracy and cost of analysis. Accuracy should be established
based on a convergence process, not based on using a single mesh.
2. Geometry should be represented as accurately as possible: true/false?
False. Only significant details should be included in the FEA model. Small and struc-
turally (or thermally) insignificant details like chamfers, draft angles, company logos,
etc. unnecessarily complicate the mesh. A good understanding of the analyzed
problem is required to distinguish between significant and insignificant details.
3. Solid elements give the best results because they accurately model the geometry:
true/false?
False. Solid elements make impressive models. However, using solid elements does
not guarantee correct results, and not all geometries are suitable for meshing with
solid elements. An example is a sheet metal structure which is impossible to mesh

© 2023 SAE International 235


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

236 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

with solid elements. When making meshing decisions, we should always consider
alternatives to solids: shell elements, beam elements, or 2D elements.
4. Better (more expensive) FEA software gives better results: true/false?
False. Correct results depend on the user’s modeling skills. An expensive program
may produce wrong results and vice versa.
5. Automatic meshing is better than manual meshing: true/false?
This is true and false at the same time. Automatic meshing is for sure better because
it takes little time as compared to mapped or truly manual meshing. Automatic
meshing is the only method available in modern FEA programs, but an automatically
produced mesh is not automatically correct. A mesher does not know what the objec-
tive of your analysis is. It just fills up model geometry with elements. It is our respon-
sibility to ensure that the mesh is refined where stress concentrations are expected,
there are enough elements across members in bending, etc. For more difficult
geometry, meshers tend to produce distorted elements and place elements with no
regard for laws of mechanics (i.e., one first order tetrahedral element across the wall
in bending). Meshers are much “safer” when used with second or higher order
elements. Never use first order elements unless you have a very good reason to use
them. Do not rely on the mesher being left on defaults; almost always, the user must
control the element size and mesh bias.
6. High accuracy of FEA results from high processing accuracy of the digital
computer: true/false?
False. First, who said that FEA is highly accurate? It may be if it is used properly and
if that high accuracy is desired. Accuracy of FEA cannot be confused with the
accuracy of solvers. Most FEA programs use a double-precision format for lower
numerical error, and in most cases, the round-off error is small as compared to other
errors: modeling and discretization errors.
7. If your FEA software reports no error, the solution will be correct: true/false?
False. No error means only that the model is correct from the solver’s point of
view. The solver will solve an incorrect model if it does not run into numerical
problems.
8. You do not really need any error estimation, the FEA is always accurate enough:
true/false?
False. One single run provides results with unknown error. The error may be low, but
we still do not know what that error is. Unless we have previous experience with
similar problems, convergence analysis is required to estimate the discretization error.
9. You should always make a very fine mesh, so you do not have to worry about error:
true/false?
False. While very fine mesh produces low discretization error, but we still need more
than one mesh to know what that error is. Also, a fine mesh does nothing to
modeling errors.
10. Higher order elements will give you more accurate results: true/false?
True if “more accurate” means “lower discretization error.” Using higher order
elements in place of lower order elements is equivalent to mesh refinement. Comparing
two otherwise identical models, with the first order elements and with the second
elements, the latter will provide more accurate results in terms of discretization error.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 14 Summary 237

Also, it is much easier to construct a correct mesh using second order elements because
second order elements map to curvilinear geometry and model linear stress distribu-
tion while first order elements cannot map to curvilinear geometry and model
constant stress.
11. First order tetrahedral solid elements are too stiff and should be avoided: true/
false?
Generally true. When using first order tetrahedral elements, we need substantially
more elements for modeling stress gradients and for correct representation of curvi-
linear geometry. Unless you have a good reason, do not use first order elements.
12. Make a coarse mesh first to find stress concentration and then refine it as needed:
true/false?
True in most cases. However, the first coarse mesh still needs to be fine enough to
detect stress concentrations. If the element size is too large in comparison to the size
of a “hot spot,” then stress concentration will not be detected, and you will never
know that you should have refined the mesh in that particular location.
13. If FEA results correlate well with the experiment (e.g., strain-gauge readings), then
all FEA results are OK: true/false?
False. A strain gauge may be placed in a spot that is modeled correctly in the finite
element model. However, correlation in one or more locations does not guarantee
that everything is fine with the model. The opposite statement is true: if FEA does
not correlate with the experiment, then something is wrong with the model or with
the experiment or both.
14. All major FEA programs have been extensively tested so you do not need to do any
benchmarking yourself: true/false?
Generally true. Still, it is recommended to run benchmark tests to get the feel of the
FEA program, particularly in the more demanding applications.
15. Highly distorted elements are OK if they are far away from stress concentrations:
true/false?
False. Distorted elements may affect the global model stiffness. In other words, they
“pollute” the model, and that may propagate to the area of interest rendering
erroneous results.
16. If you study displacements and not stresses, then you can use a coarse mesh: true/
false?
True. Nodal displacements converge faster than stresses. Still, using a certain element
size should be justified by the results of the convergence analysis.
17. Modal analysis can use a coarser mesh than stress analysis: true/false?
True. Modal analysis finds natural frequencies and shapes of vibration which are
global measures as opposed to stresses which are local measures. Details may usually
be ignored. However, if modal analysis provides prerequisite results to vibration
analysis which finds stresses, then the mesh used in the modal analysis should satisfy
all meshing requirements applicable to stress analysis.
18. FEA offers a deceiving level of detail: true/false?
True. Results may come with numbers with 10 digits accuracy, and different plots
may be produced and animated. It is easy to forget that all results rest on simplifying
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

238 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

assumptions made in the formulation of a mathematical model and on the subsequent


discretization of that model.
19. Model geometry is the most readily controlled of all data, loads less so; restraints
(supports) are the most difficult to control: true/false?
True. Geometry is the most intuitive input and can be inspected using CAD tools.
Loads are relatively easy to relate to as they are vectors, and magnitudes are expressed
in numbers. Restraints are the most difficult to define and proper definition of
restraints is often neglected.
20. Test data always have errors and may be inconsistent with FEA assumptions: true/
false?
True. Loads and supports may be different, measurement errors may be present, etc.
21. Incompetent analysis gives, at best, unreliable results, and, at worst, is positively
misleading: true/false?
True. In the hands of an enthusiastic but unskilled user, the FEA is an expensive toy
or, worse, a dangerous tool.

14.2. Frequently Asked Questions


1. What is the objective of discretization of continuum?
A continuous body has an infinite number of DOFs. Discretization replaces it with
a system with a finite number of DOFs possible to solve with numerical methods.
Discretization introduces a discretization error.
2. What are the major assumptions made in the design of an FE?
The fundamental assumption in the formulation of an FE is that everything there is
to know about the element is determined by nodal displacements (or temperatures).
As soon as the nodal displacements are found, we can find displacements at any point
inside the element, along its edge, or face using the element displacement
interpolation functions.
3. What are the basic steps in FEA?
Step 1: Construction of a mathematical model
•• Definition of the type of analysis
•• Definition of geometry (solution domain)
•• Definition and assignment of material properties
•• Definition of restraints
•• Definition of loads
Step 2: Creation of finite element model
•• Discretizing geometry, mass, and boundary conditions
Step 3: Solution
Step 4: Analysis of results
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 14 Summary 239

4. What are the primary and secondary unknowns in FEA?


The primary unknowns are nodal displacements in structural analysis and nodal
temperatures in thermal analysis. Depending on the type of element, nodal displace-
ment are defined by six displacement components: three translations and three rota-
tions, or by their subset. Nodal temperatures are scalars requiring only one DOF. In
structural analysis, secondary unknowns such as strains and stresses can be calculated
based on displacement solution. In thermal analysis, secondary unknowns such as
temperature gradient and heat flux are calculated based on temperature solution.
5. What is the nodal DOF?
Nodal DOF is an unknown assigned to a node. The physical interpretations are
displacements in structural problems and temperatures in thermal problems. In
structural analysis nodes have up to six DOFs: three translations and three rota-
tions. The actual number depends on the type of element. Nodes of 3D shell elements
have six DOFs (three translations and three rotations); nodes of 3D solid elements
usually have three DOFs (translations); nodes of 2D elements have two DOFs. In
thermal analysis, nodes have one DOF: temperature. By defining supports at certain
nodes, some DOFs are assigned prescribed values. For example, a fixed support is
modeled by prescribing zero displacements to all displacement components of a
given node.
6. What is the relationship between the number of nodes and the number of DOFs in
an FE model?
Assuming that all elements are of the same type, the number of DOFs in a model
may be calculated by multiplying the number of nodes by the number of DOFs per
node minus the number of DOFs removed by restraints.
7. What characterizes the state of the minimum total potential energy?
The state of the minimum total potential energy of an elastic body under load is the
state of equilibrium. The equilibrium of an FE model may be found by looking for
the set of nodal displacements that minimizes the total potential energy of the model.
8. How are fundamental equations of FEA formulated?
Fundamental FEA equations are formulated by minimizing the total potential energy
of the model; other methods may also be used to formulate these equations. The
equations take the form of linear algebraic equations. In a static problem, the equa-
tions may be written using matrix notation as:

 K   d    F  (14.1)

where [K] is a stiffness matrix, [d] is an unknown vector of nodal displacements, and
[F ] is a vector of nodal loads.
9. What is a displacement interpolation function?
A displacement interpolation function is a formula used to calculate displacement
in the given location of the element using displacements of nodes. Displacement
interpolation functions are defined on element edges, faces, and element interior.
Displacement interpolation functions must satisfy several requirements:
A. Internal compatibility: displacements must be continuous over the
entire element.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

240 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

B. Inter-element compatibility: displacement along the common edge between


two elements must be described by the same function so no “cracks” or
“overlaps” form in-between elements.
C. If the element is displaced as a rigid body, the element must show zero strain.
This is called the patch test.
D. A displacement interpolation function must be able to model constant
strain cases.
If conditions A and B are satisfied, the element is “conforming.” If conditions C
and D are also satisfied, the element is called “complete.” If elements are both
conforming and complete, the solution of an FE model will converge to the exact
solution of the mathematical model during the convergence process. Displacement
interpolation functions impose artificial restraints on the structure; therefore, the
FE model is always stiffer than the mathematical model. The added stiffness decreases
with mesh refinement and/or increase in the element order.
10. What is the difference between the first order and second order element?
The order of an element is determined by the order of its displacement interpolation
functions. Displacement interpolation functions are polynomials. The first order
element has the first order (linear) displacement interpolation functions; the second
order element has the second order displacement interpolation functions, etc. The first
order element has straight edges and nodes placed only in corners. The second order
element has mid-side nodes along the element edges in addition to the corner nodes.
Consequently, the second order elements may have curved edges and faces. If the shape
of edges and faces of an element are defined by functions of the same order as the
element displacement interpolation functions, then the element is called iso-para-
metric. The higher the element order the more computationally intensive it becomes.
At the same time, the higher order elements have important advantages. Fewer
elements are needed to model the given displacement and stress field; curvilinear
edges are easier to work with when modeling complex geometry and higher order
elements converge faster with mesh refinement.
11. How do elements interact with each other?
Elements interact only through common nodes. Why do elements stay together when
loaded, without forming “cracks” along edges or overlapping each other? This is taken
care of by element compatibility. If the same displacement interpolation function is
used by two elements along the shared edge or face, then displacements along both
edges or faces are identical and displacements across the boundary between elements
are continuous.
12. How is mass assigned to the finite element model?
Mass is assigned to nodes of the finite element mesh. Therefore, mass distribution
and inertial properties of the finite element model are not the same as of the contin-
uous mathematical model.
13. What are the different types of finite elements?
Finite elements can be classified in many ways, for example:
•• By application: structural, thermal.
•• By dimensionality: 3D, 2D, 1D.
•• By type: solid, shell, membrane, beam, plate, etc.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 14 Summary 241

•• By shape: triangular, quadrilateral, tetrahedral, hexahedral, prism.


•• By order: first order, second order, higher order.
•• By FEA method: h elements, p elements.
•• By type of analysis: linear, nonlinear material, large displacements, large strain, etc.
•• By element formulation: thin shell, thick shell, axisymmetric, etc.
•• Special elements: mass, spring, gap, damper, etc.

14. What are compatible elements and non-compatible elements?


Compatible elements produce a continuous displacement (or temperature) field when
assembled in a mesh because the same displacement interpolation functions are used
by both elements along the shared edges and faces. Compatible elements will not
form a “crack” or an “overlap.” Non-compatible elements can be forced into compat-
ibility by defining constraints (links). Links should not be used in areas where accurate
results are required. Stress averaging should not be done between non-
compatible elements.
15. What is a distorted element?
The “natural” shape for a triangular element is an equilateral triangle; for a quadri-
lateral, it is square; etc. The actual shape that element assumes after mapping onto
the model geometry differs from the natural shape. Elements are designed to work
within a certain range of shape distortion. Common types of distortion are aspect
ratio and curvature distortion. A finite element mesh should be run through an
element quality check and excessive distortions should be eliminated.
16. What is the difference between h elements and p elements?
h elements are elements that do not change the order during solution. Convergence
analysis with h elements is done by mesh refinement. The element size is reduced
during the process of mesh refinements. The name “h element” comes from the
element characteristic dimension denoted by h.
p elements do not have a fixed order. Solution of a p element model is done in
several iterative loops while the element order is upgraded until the difference in
results between consecutive iterations becomes less than the requested accuracy. The
name “p element” comes from the p-order of the polynomial displacement interpola-
tion function that is upgraded during the iterative solution. In most programs using
p elements, displacement interpolation functions are upgraded only where required,
i.e., where the difference in certain measures between two consecutive runs is larger
than the user’s specified accuracy. p elements can use displacement interpolation
functions of different orders along different edges. This requires the introduction of
blending functions which are used to determine displacements inside the element
based on displacements along edges and faces.
17. What are the different types of convergence process?
An h convergence is done by mesh refinement by reducing the element size. That
reduction can be done globally, by refining mesh everywhere in the model, or locally,
by refining the mesh only where stress concentration or heat flux is expected. h
convergence may be performed by the user who runs the solution, refines the mesh,
compares results between the consecutive runs, etc. Mesh refinement can be done
globally or locally. Some programs offer automated h convergence capabilities.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

242 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

A p convergence does not affect the element size; the mesh stays the same during
the convergence process, but the element order is upgraded. A p convergence is done
automatically in an iterative solution until the user-specified convergence criterion
is satisfied; the only input required from the user is convergence criteria and the
desired accuracy. A p convergence is an adaptive process and requires elements capable
of upgrading the order of selected edges and faces.
Sometimes the desired accuracy cannot be achieved even with the highest avail-
able element p-order. In that case, the user must refine the mesh manually like in the
h convergence process and then run the p convergence process again. This is called
p-h or h-p convergence.
18. What is the objective of convergence analysis?
FEA gives only an approximate solution. Convergence analysis estimates the discreti-
zation error. The discretization error in the FEA solution does not have to be mini-
mized but should be low enough to satisfy user’s requirements.
Examples of convergence criteria:
•• Strain energy
•• RMS strain energy (local or global)
•• Stress (local or global)
•• Displacement (local or global)

19. What is the difference between verification and validation of FEA results?
Verification checks if the mathematical model, as submitted to be solved with FEA,
has been correctly discretized and solved; verification deals with the solution of the
mathematical model. Validation determines if the results correctly represent reality
from the perspective of the intended use of the model. It checks if the results correctly
apply to reality.
20. What types of errors affect the accuracy of FEA results?
•• Modeling error
Modeling error originates from the fact that FEA does not work on the real
structure but on its idealized mathematical model. The idealizations introduce
modeling errors that can be reduced, but never eliminated, by good modeling
practices. The modeling error cannot be estimated by any FEA technique because
FEA provides an approximate solution to whatever mathematical model was
chosen. Modeling error happens before FEA enters the stage. The study of
modeling errors answers the question “How well does the mathematical model
represent reality?”
•• Discretization error
Discretization error results from using a finite number of DOFs to approximate a
solution characterized by an infinite number of DOFs. Discretization is accom-
plished by meshing. Discretization imposes certain assumptions on the data of
interest, for example, displacements inside the element must be of the second order.
Discretization errors are assessed in the convergence process.
Discretization error can be defined as a convergence error or a solution error.
Convergence error is the difference in the results between two consecutive steps
in the convergence process. This error can be calculated explicitly. Solution error
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 14 Summary 243

is the difference between FEA results and results that would have been provided
by a continuous mathematical model. Solution error can be only estimated but
not calculated exactly. To estimate the solution error, one must assess the conver-
gence of results and predict changes in the results within the several next iterations
as if they were performed. Analysis of discretization error answers the question
“What is the error of solution of the mathematical model?”
•• Numerical error also called solution error
Numerical error of FEA results is the round-off error accumulated by the solver;
usually it is low.
•• Error of interpretation of results
A typical example would be using von Mises stress to calculate the factor of safety
of a brittle material. The error of interpretation of results should be completely
eliminated by the FEA user’s training.
21. Can you estimate discretization error without convergence analysis?
Strictly speaking, No; a single solution provides results with an unknown discretiza-
tion error. However, there are cases where skipping convergence analysis may be OK.
If you have successfully analyzed and validated similar problems, then analysis of
discretization error may be skipped, if your model is “reasonably” close to the former
one. You can also use global or local error estimators provided in your software. These
error estimators are related to the difference between averaged and non-
averaged stresses.
22. What is stress averaging?
Stress averaging is a technique used to present stress results. Implementation may
vary in different FEA programs. Stress-averaging procedure can be explained as
follows. Stress results are calculated for each element in certain locations called Gauss
points. If more than one Gauss point is present in the element (as is the case with
second and higher order elements), one averaged stress is reported for the element.
Even though those stresses are averaged between Gauss points, they are called non-
averaged stresses or element stresses because averaging is done internally within the
same element. Alternatively, stresses in Gauss points may be extrapolated to element
nodes without prior averaging between themselves. Most often, one node is shared
by several elements, and each element reports different stress at the shared node.
Stress is then averaged on node producing averaged (or nodal) stress results. Both
nodal (averaged) and element (non-averaged) stress should be examined during the
analysis of stress results. The large difference between nodal and element stress indi-
cates the need for mesh refinement.
23. What is the difference between loads and boundary conditions?
Loads and restraints applied to the boundary of the solution domain are both
boundary conditions. Loads are called natural boundary conditions and restraints
are called essential boundary conditions. Volume loads like gravity or inertial load
are not boundary conditions.
24. How many sets of loads and restraints may be defined for one linear static analysis?
If your program permits it, you can define different load cases because the stiffness
matrix remains the same, no matter what load is applied. However, only one set of
restraints may be defined because the stiffness matrix changes with the change
of restraints.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

244 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

25. What is the difference between boundary conditions applied to geometry and
FEA model?
A common way to apply loads and restraints is to define them on CAD geometry.
The loads and restraints are converted into nodal loads and nodal restraints during
meshing. Even though meshing is commonly understood as discretization of
geometry, everything else in the mathematical model is also discretized. Loads,
restraints, and mass are discretized and applied to nodes. There are no continuous
entities in an finite element model.
26. How are loads and restraints represented in the FE model?
Real loads acting on a structure—pressure, own weight, inertial forces, etc.—are
continuous. Point loads or line loads do not exist in nature. The same applies to
restraints. Loads in a finite element model are represented as nodal forces and
moments. Restraints are defined on nodes as prescribed displacement. For example,
a fixed restraint defines zero displacement.
27. What are the major types of FEA?
This depends on how FEA is classified. There is structural and thermal FEA, linear
and nonlinear FEA, static and vibration (dynamic) FEA, etc. Also, we can classify
FEA by the objective like Design FEA when it is used as a design tool, forensic analysis
to find out why a structure failed, or an optimization exercise to improve the
existing design.
28. What are the types of nonlinearities?
A nonlinear analysis is the one in which the stiffness of the structure changes during
the process of load application. That change needs to be modeled in the process of
iterative solution that is always required in nonlinear analysis. There are different
sources of nonlinearity; the following is not a complete list:
•• Nonlinear supports
•• Contact stress
•• Tension/compression only links
•• Nonlinear elastic foundation
•• Offset or eccentric loads
•• Buckling
•• Geometric non-linearity
•• Material nonlinearity
29. How to reduce the size of the finite element model.
•• Taking advantage of repetitive geometry
Sometimes geometry and boundary conditions (loads and restraints) are charac-
terized by certain symmetry such as mirror symmetry, anti-symmetry, cyclic
symmetry, or axial symmetry. In these cases, it is enough to model only one portion
of the model and simulate the remaining portion with the applicable boundary
conditions. The extra time spent on modification of geometry is usually well
worth it.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 14 Summary 245

•• Defeaturing geometry
Defeaturing of geometry, meaning deleting structurally insignificant details, is
particularly important when working with complex CAD geometry. Manufacturing
geometry produced in CAD is not oriented toward analysis. If used without modi-
fications, it may result in a very complicated model that is too large to solve.
Defeaturing must be done very carefully; features important for the objective of
analysis must not be removed.
•• Idealization: using shell or beam elements in place of solid elements
For a certain class of geometry, meshing with solid elements is out of the question.
For example, sheet metal must be meshed with shell elements and weldments with
beam elements.
•• Using 2D representations
Working with 2D models simplifies model generation, solution, and analysis of
results but is applicable only to a narrow class of problems suitable for plane stress,
plane strain, or axisymmetric representation.
30. What is the bandwidth of stiffness matrix, why is it important, and how can it
be reduced?
Bandwidth is a parameter describing a stiffness matrix. It is an important consider-
ation when solving FEA equations. The stiffness matrix in FEA is symmetric, and in
most cases, all non-zero elements of this matrix are grouped along the main diagonal.
The bandwidth is the largest distance between non-zero coefficients in any row. The
larger the bandwidth, the more numerically demanding is the solution. For low
bandwidth, nodes should be numbered in such a way that the numbers assigned to
nodes belonging to each element are close to each other. Nodes are numbered auto-
matically to minimize the bandwidth.
31. How should a typical FEA report look like?
Typical parts of an FEA report include
•• Executive summary
Explains the objective of the project, part number, project number, presents essen-
tial assumption, results, and conclusions.
•• Introduction
Describes the problem: why did it require FEA; what kind of FEA was that, static,
contact stress, vibration analysis, etc.
•• Description of material model, loads, and restraints
Explains the material model in use; describes restraints and load cases analyzed.
Load diagrams and discussion of simplifying assumptions should be included in
this part.
•• Geometry
Describes the model geometry, defeaturing, and/or idealization, if applicable;
justifies the modeling approach (solids elements? shells elements? 2D?) and the
choice of meshing.
•• Analysis of results
Presents the data of interest; estimates error; calculates the factors of safety; etc.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

246 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

•• Conclusions
Makes recommendations to the requester, proposes necessary modifications and
further studies if needed; recommends testing procedure (e.g., strain-gauge test,
fatigue life test) to validate results; makes a recommendation regarding future
similar designs.
•• Project documentation
To build in-house expertise you need very good documentation of the project
besides the report so the project can be easily reused in the future by somebody
else. The documentation should include extensive write-up, design drawings,
model explanations, and computer backups. You should allow a considerable
amount of time to prepare project documentation.
•• Follow-up
After tests are completed, append your report with test results, discuss result
correlation, and re-run the FEA analysis if the correlation was not satisfactory.
32. Where are mistakes often made?
Mistakes can be made just about anywhere during an FEA project, but the most
common are
•• Incorrect mathematical model
•• Improper use of elements in a mesh
For example, one layer of first order elements is placed across the thickness of the
wall in bending or elements incorrectly mapped to geometry.
•• Using excessively distorted elements
Excessively distorted are often produced with an automatic mesh generator
running on default settings; the user’s input into meshing is almost always required.
•• Too few elements in a mesh
If a mesh is too coarse, it will not be able to model the structure properly; stress
concentrations may not be detected.
•• Incorrect restraints
A common mistake is an overly restrained model resulting in an overly stiff struc-
ture. Displacement and, consequently, stresses are then underestimated.
•• Hasty result analysis, no lessons learned
FEA provides a wealth of results which need to be analyzed properly. Each project
should contribute to the accumulated corporate experience.
33. What are alternatives to FEA?
As far as Computer Aided Engineering is concerned, we can use other numerical
tools like the Finite Volume Method or Boundary Element Method. Also, meshless
methods are being developed and look very promising. However, let us not forget
about the more traditional approach like long-hand calculations, computerized tables,
and testing. These methods are less expensive and often more reliable than FEA.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 14 Summary 247

34. Golden rule of FEA.


A finite element model (or any model for that matter) may never be accepted as a final
and true description of the system. At best it may be regarded as a good enough
description of certain aspects that are of particular interest to us. The ultimate objec-
tive of the FEA is not to find the exact solution such as displacement or stress. The
objective is to obtain a reasonable approximation of reality that will allow us to make
the correct design decision.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

15
FEA Resources

T
here are many sources of FEA expertise available to users that include, but are not
limited to,
•• Engineering textbooks
•• Software specific manuals
•• Engineering journals
•• Professional development courses that include face-to-face and distant learning
•• FEA users’ groups
•• Government organizations
Engineering literature offers a large selection of reference material on FEA and engi-
neering analysis closely related to FEA; we will list only a few of them in the order of
relevance to topics discussed in this book.
1. Adams, V. and Askenazi, A., Building Better Products with Finite Element Analysis (Santa Fe, NM:
OnWord Press, 1999)

2. Incropera, F., Dewitt, D., Bergman, T., and Lavine, A., Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer
(Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2007)

3. Inman, D., Engineering Vibration (Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall, 1994)

4. Logan, D., A First Course in the Finite Element Method (Boston, MA: Brooks/Cole, 2007)

5. Szabo, B. and Babuska, I., Finite Element Analysis (Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1991)

© 2023 SAE International 249


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

250 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

Readers who use SOLIDWORKS Simulation may be interested in software specific


textbooks that expand on topics discussed in this book and offer software specific information:

Kurowski, P., Engineering Analysis with SOLIDWORKS Simulation 2022 (Mission, KS: SDC
Publications, 2022)

Kurowski, P., Vibration Analysis with SOLIDWORKS Simulation 2022 (Mission, KS: SDC Publications,
2022)

Kurowski, P., Thermal Analysis with SOLIDWORKS Simulation 2022 and Flow Simulation 2022
(Mission, KS: SDC Publications, 2022)

With so many applications for FEA, attempts have been made to create a governing
body overlooking FEA standards and practices. One of the leading organizations in this
field is the National Agency for Finite Element Methods and Standards (NAFEMS).
NAFEMS has published many excellent titles such as:
•• A Finite Element Primer
•• A Finite Element Dynamics Primer
•• Guidelines to Finite Element Practice
•• Background to Benchmarks
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

16
Glossary

Averaged Stresses These stresses are calculated at nodes by averaging stresses at the node
as reported by all elements sharing that node. Nodal stresses are “smoothed out” and, by
virtue of averaging, produce continuous stresses in the model. Average stresses are also
called nodal stresses.
Beam Element Element produced by meshing a line (may be straight or curved).
Black Body A black body is an ideal radiator and an ideal absorber of heat in the form
of electromagnetic waves.
Boundary Element Method A numerical method used for solving field problems; only
the boundary of the solution domain needs to be discretized. The Boundary Element Method
is very efficient for analyzing compact 3D shapes, but difficult to use on more “spread
out” shapes.
CAD Computer Aided Design.
CAD Specific Geometry Geometry with details required for manufacturing.
Cleanup Process of removing and/or repairing geometric features that would prevent
the mesher from creating the mesh or would result in an incorrect mesh.
Conjugate Heat Transfer Heat transfer process in solids and fluids.
Convergence Criteria Convergence criteria are conditions assessed during the conver-
gence process. In an automated convergence process convergence criteria are used to decide
when the process should stop.

© 2023 SAE International 253


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

254 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

Convergence Process A process of systematic changes to the mesh to see how the data
of interest change with the change of mesh and (hopefully) prove that the data of interest
are not significantly dependent on the choice of discretization. A convergence process may
be performed as h convergence or p convergence.
Defeaturing Process of removing (or suppressing) geometric features in CAD geometry
to simplify the finite element mesh.
Degree of Freedom (DOF) Ability of a node to perform displacement in the form of
translation and/or rotation. In structural analysis, a node may have up to 6 DOFs, depending
on the element type. In thermal analysis nodes have 1 DOF, this is temperature.
Discretization The process of dividing a continuous mathematical model into discrete
“pieces” called elements. A visible effect of discretization is a finite element mesh. However,
mass, loads, and restraints are also discretized.
Discretization Error This error affects FEA results because FEA works on an assembly
of discrete elements (mesh) rather than on a continuous structure. The finer the finite
element mesh the lower the discretization error, but the solution takes more time.
Displacement Interpolation Function A polynomial function defined on nodal degrees
of freedom: displacements or temperature. It calculates displacements or temperatures
inside an element (in the element volume, on the element faces, and along the element edges)
based on the known nodal displacements or temperatures.
Distortion of an Element Departure from the element ideal shape. It happens as a result
of element mapping onto the model geometry.
Emissivity Effectiveness in emitting energy as thermal radiation.
FEA Finite Element Analysis.
FEA-Specific Geometry Geometry intended for FEA, usually derived from CAD geometry
by defeaturing, idealization, and cleanup.
Finite Difference Method An alternative to the FEA; the solution domain is discretized
into a grid. The Finite Difference Method is generally less efficient for solving structural
and thermal problems but is often used in fluid dynamics problems.
Finite Element Finite elements are the building blocks of a mesh, defined by the coordi-
nates of their nodes and by functions approximating of distribution of sought-for quantities,
such as displacements or temperatures.
Finite Volumes Method This is an alternative to the FEA method of solving field problems,
similar to the Finite Difference Method and frequently used in fluid dynamics problems.
Following Load Load which retains its orientation relative to the deforming model. The
difference between the following and the non-following load is an important consideration
in nonlinear geometry analysis.
Frequency Response Analysis Type of vibration analysis where excitation is a function
of frequency.
h Element h elements are all elements, for which the order does not change during analysis.
Convergence analysis of a model using h elements is done by refining the mesh and
comparing results (like displacement, stresses, etc.) before and after the refinement.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 16 Glossary 255

The name h comes from the element characteristic dimension h, which is reduced during
consecutive mesh refinements.
Idealization Making simplifying assumptions in the process of defining a mathematical
model. Idealization may involve simplifying geometry, replacing thin walls with midplane
surfaces, using 2D representations, etc.
Idealization Error The idealization error results from the fact that analysis is conducted
on a model and not on a real-life object. Geometry, material properties, loads, and restraints
all are idealized in models submitted to FEA.
Linear Material Material model where stress is linearly proportional to strain.
Mapping Process of changing an element shape from the ideal shape to a shape it assumes
in the mesh; element mapping takes place during meshing.
Membrane Element Element produced by meshing a surface. As opposed to shell element,
membrane element does not have bending stiffness.
Meshing Process of discretization geometry, mass, restraints, and loads. This is an auto-
mated process with user-specified controls.
Mesh Diagnostic Task performed by an FEA program that checks the mesh for element
distortion, element connectivity, etc.
Meshing Process of discretizing the model geometry. As a result of meshing, the originally
continuous geometry is represented by an assembly of finite elements.
Modal Analysis Modal analysis calculates the natural frequencies and the associated
shapes of vibration. Modal analysis does not calculate displacements or stresses.
Modeling Error This type of error results from idealizations that are introduced in the
process of creating a mathematical model. See Idealization Error.
Non-averaged Stresses Stresses in an element without averaging them with stresses
reported by neighboring elements; also called element stresses.
Non-following Load Load which retains its orientation relative to the external coordinate
system and not to the deforming model. The difference between the following and the non-
following load is an important consideration in nonlinear geometry analysis.
Numerical Error Error caused by the accumulated round-off error during solution. The
value of numerical errors is usually very low.
p Adaptive Solution Solution method using p elements. A p adaptive solution provides
results with a narrowly specified accuracy but is more time consuming than the solution
using h elements.
p Element p Elements are elements that do not have a predefined order. The solution of
a p element model requires several iterations while the element order is upgraded until the
difference in the user-specified measures (e.g., global strain energy, RMS stress) becomes
less than the requested accuracy. The name p comes from the order of polynomial functions
that is changed during the solution.
Pre-load Pre-load is a load that modifies the structure stiffness. Pre-load is an important
consideration in modal analysis where it may change natural frequencies. In some cases,
pre-load must be also considered in static analysis.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

256 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

Restraints Any condition defined on displacements of nodes. Supports, symmetry


boundary conditions, etc. are examples of restraints.
Rigid Body Mode A mode of vibration with zero frequency found in structures that are
not fully restrained or not restrained at all. A structure with no restraints has six rigid body
modes. Also see Rigid Body Motion.
Rigid Body Motion Rigid body motion is the ability to move without experiencing any
deformation. In the case of a fully supported structure, the only way it can move under a
load is to deform its shape. If a structure is not fully supported, it can move as a rigid body
without any deformation.
Root Mean Square (RMS) Stress Square root of the mean of the squares of stress; RMS
stress may be used as a convergence criterion.
Shell Element Element intended for meshing surfaces. Shell element shape is triangular
or quadrilateral. Shell element has no physical thickness; thickness is defined as a number.
Nodes of a shell element have 6 DOFs.
Singularity A condition when a mathematical model has no solution in a certain location.
Common stress singularity is a sharp reentrant edge. There is no stress solution in that
location. Stress is divergent with mesh refinement or element order upgrade.
Small Displacements Assumption Analysis based on the assumption of small displace-
ments does not consider changes in stiffness caused by displacements. Analysis based on
this assumption is also called linear geometry analysis. However, the magnitude of displace-
ments itself is not the deciding factor in determining whether the small displacement
assumption is valid. What matters is whether the displacement significantly change the
stiffness of the analyzed structure.
Solid Element 3D element produced by meshing volume (solid geometry). Nodes of solid
elements have 3 DOFs.
Steady State Thermal Analysis Thermal analysis that assumes that temperature does not
change with time.
Structural Stiffness Stiffness characterizes the structural response to an applied load.
Structural stiffness is a function of shape, material properties, and restraints.
Symmetry Boundary Conditions Displacement conditions defined on a flat face in the
plane of symmetry, allowing for in-plane displacement and restricting any out-of-plane
displacements. Symmetry boundary conditions allow to perform analysis on one-half of a
model if the model geometry, loads, and supports are all symmetric.
Tetrahedral Element Type of an element intended for meshing volume (solid) geometry.
It belongs to the family of solid elements besides hexahedral (brick) and wedge elements.
It is the most widely used solid element.
Tensile Strength The maximum stress that may occur in a structure. If the tensile strength
is exceeded, failure will take place. Tensile strength is used to calculate the factor of safety
of brittle materials.
Thermal Analysis Thermal analysis finds temperature, heat flow, and related quantities.
Time Response Analysis Type of vibration analysis where excitation is a function of time.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

CHAPTER 16 Glossary 257

Transient Thermal Analysis Thermal analysis where temperature and other heat transfer
parameters change with time.
Validation Validation determines if an FEA model correctly represents reality from the
perspective of the intended use of the model. It checks if the results correctly describe the
real-life behavior of the analyzed object.
Verification Verification checks if the mathematical model, as submitted to be solved
with FEA, has been correctly discretized and solved.
Von Mises Stress A stress measure that takes into consideration all six stress components
of the state of stress. Von Mises stress is a scalar, non-negative value. The magnitude of von
Mises stress can be used to determine the safety factors of ductile materials.
Yield Strength This refers to the maximum stress that can be allowed in a model before
plastic deformation takes place. Yield strength is used to calculate the factor of safety in
ductile materials.
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

17
List of Exercises

The exercises (Table 17.1) may be downloaded from:


•• https://sae.org/binaries/content/assets/cm/content/publications/books/feade-2022-
hands-on-exercises.zip
The exercises come in Parasolid format that can be opened with most CAD programs and
in SOLIDWORKS Simulation 2022 format. SOLIDWORKS Simulation models include
ready to run studies.

© 2023 SAE International 259


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

260 Finite Element Analysis for Design Engineers

TABLE 17.1 List of exercise files in Parasolid format and SOLIDWORKS 2022 format.
File are listed in the order of appearance in hands-on exercises.
Chapter Parasolid SOLIDWORKS 2022
4 HOLLOW PLATE.x_t HOLLOW PLATE.sldprt
L BRACKET01.x_t L BRACKET01.sldprt
WEDGE.x_t WEDGE.sldprt
5 BRACKET01.x_t BRACKET01.sldprt
CANTILEVER.x_t CANTILEVER.sldprt
6 BRACKET02.x_t BRACKET02.sldprt
SHAFT01.x_t SHAFT01.sldprt
PRESSURE TANK.x_t PRESSURE TANK.sldprt
RING.x_t RING.sldprt
LINK01.x_t LINK01.sldprt
PLATE.x_t PLATE.sldprt
7 CANTILEVER BEAM.x_t CANTILEVER BEAM.sldprt
SHAFT02.x_t SHAFT02.sldprt
ROUND PLATE01.x_t ROUND PLATE01.sldprt
LINK02.x_t LINK02.sldprt
SLIDING SUPPORT.x_t SLIDING SUPPORT.sldprt
CLAMP01.x_t CLAMP01.sldprt
CLAMP02.x_t CLAMP02.sldprt
8 BRACKET NL.x_t BRACKET NL.sldprt
L BRACKET02.x_t L BRACKET02.sldprt
9 TUNING FORK.x_t TUNING FORK.sldprt
BOX.x_t BOX.sldprt
AIRPLANE.x_t AIRPLANE.sldprt
BALL.x_t BALL.sldprt
LINK03.x_t LINK03.sldprt
HELICOPTER BLADE.x_t HELICOPTER BLADE.sldprt
COLUMN.x_t COLUMN.sldprt
BRACKET03.x_t BRACKET03.sldprt
10 NOTCHED COLUMN.x_t NOTCHED COLUMN.sldprt
ROUND PLATE02.x_t ROUND PLATE02.sldprt
CURVED COLUMN.x_t CURVED COLUMN.sldprt
STAND.x_t STAND.sldprt
CURVED SHEET.x_t CURVED SHEET.sldprt
11 HAMMER.x_t HAMMER.sldprt
ELBOW PIPE.x_t ELBOW PIPE.sldprt
CENTRIFUGE.x_t CENTRIFUGE.sldprt
PLANK.x_t CENTRIFUGE.xlsx
PLANK.sldprt
12 BRACKET04.x_t BRACKET04.sldprt
HEAT SINK.x_t HEAT SINK.sldprt
CHANNEL.x_t CHANNEL.sldprt
SPACE HEATER.x_t SPACE HEATER.sldasm
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

Index

A chain of events, 165, 167 pressure, 122


Anti-symmetry, 87 compressive loads, 163–164 solution, 119, 122
bracket02 model, 97, 98 elastic-perfectly plastic material model, Von Mises stress, 118, 120
definition, 88, 90 165, 167, 168, 170 Convection, 201–203, 208, 209
shaft01 model, 99 vs. linear buckling analysis, Convergence process, 149, 241–242
torsion, 91 167, 173 convergence curve, 46–47
vibration modes, 148, 155, 156 linear material model, 165, 166, 169 displacement singularity
visualization, 88, 89 Load Control method, 164 edge support, 54, 55, 57, 58
Automatic meshing, 67–69, 236 load-displacement curve, 167, 173 Von Mises stress, 54, 56
Averaged stress, 34–36, 243 onset controlling, 174–175, 178–179 h convergence
Axial symmetry, 92, 101 results, 167, 171, 172 adaptive h convergence, 42–44
“snap-through” effect, 177–178 global mesh refinement, 36–40
B
stress stiffness, 164 local mesh refinement, 40–42
Boundary conditions, 243–244
structural collapse, 167, 170 hollow plate
anti-symmetry, 87
notched column, 176–177 description, 58–59
bracket02 model, 97, 98
stress stiffening, 175, 176 objective, 58–59
definition, 88, 90
Buckling Load Factor (BLF), 160–163 procedure, 59–60
shaft01 model, 99
L bracket model, 60–61
torsion, 91 C
p convergence, 44–46
visualization, 88, 89 Computational Fluid Dynamic (CFD)
process choice, 46
axial symmetry, 92, 101 modules, 206
solution error, 46–48
cyclic symmetry, 92–93 Computer-Aided Design (CAD), 2
stress singularity, 58
definition, 86 analyses, 10
elastic-perfectly plastic material, 50–52
degrees of freedom, 94 by curve, 8–9
sharp reentrant edge, 50, 51, 53
displacement, 7 displacement boundary conditions, 7
2D plane stress problem, 48, 49
load, 7 geometry preparation, 85
Von Mises stress, 48, 49
mirror symmetry load boundary conditions, 7
wedge model, 61–62
blue faces, 87, 88, 90 pulley geometry, 8
Cyclic symmetry, 92–93
bracket02 model, 96, 98 solution domain, 7, 8
definition, 88, 90 by surfaces, 8–9 D
link01 model, 102–103 system of units, 84–85 Defeaturing, 212–213, 245
pressure tank model, 100, 101 by volumes, 8–9 Degree of Freedom (DOF), 11–12, 239
restraints, 95 Computer-Aided Engineering (CAE) first order element, 18, 19
Boundary Element Method, 10, 246 applications, 219–220 mesh refinement, 36, 37, 41
Boundary value problem, 10 boundary conditions, 2 realignment, 94
Buckling analysis design engineers, 4–5 second order polynomial functions, 18, 19
linear analysis material properties, 2 Discretization, 22–23
analogies and terminology, 160 mechanism analysis, 2–3 Discretization error, 14, 238, 242–243
BLF, 160–163 numerical methods, 10 accuracy, 235
convergence, 163 Conduction, 200–201, 207, 209 convergence process (see Convergence
stress stiffness, 160 Conjugate heat transfer, 206 process)
modes of failure, 159, 160 Contact analysis, 120, 126 element size, 33, 34
nonlinear analysis cylindrical faces, 117, 118, 125–126 stress results, 34–36
Arc-Length Control method, large displacement analysis, 119, 121 Displacement interpolation function,
164, 165 mesh, 118, 119 239–240
buckling mode shape, 167, 171 oversized ring, 119, 121 artificial restraints, 20–22

© 2023 SAE International 261


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

262 Index

definition, 17 displacement results, 109, 111 forced, 71–73


first order element, 18, 19 linear analysis incompatible elements, 70–71
requirements, 20 displacement plots, 109, 110 Meshing
second order polynomial functions, 18, 19 model deformation, 109, 110 automatic, 67–69
Displacement singularity round shaft, couple of forces, 110, 123 bracket01 model, 79–80
edge support, 54, 55, 57, 58 shaft swelling, 109, 111 cantilever, 80
Von Mises stress, 54, 56 torsion, 109, 112 compatibility, 69
Displacement solution, 239 membrane stress stiffening compatible elements, 70
Distortion, 216, 218, 241 bending stiffness, 112, 113 forced, 71–73
aspect ratio, 73 floating hinge configuration, 114, incompatible elements, 70–71
curvature distortion, 73, 74 115, 124 complex CAD geometry, 85
tangent edges, 73, 74 linear displacement analysis, 114, design process
warpage, 73, 75 116, 117 aspect ratio plots, 216, 217
load-displacement curve, 113, 114 Jacobian ratio, 216, 217
E
results, 112, 113 mesh adequacy, 218
Eigenvalue Buckling analysis. See Linear
thin beam under pressure, 114, 116 tangent faces, 216, 217
buckling analysis
thin flat plate, 112, 123–124 element distortion
F non-conservative load, 106, 108 aspect ratio, 73
Finite element (FE), 1, 247 sliding support, 116, 125 curvature distortion, 73, 74
assumption, 238 types, 105–106 tangent edges, 73, 74
capabilities, 31 Geometry cleanup, 214–216 warpage, 73, 75
discretization, 22–23 Geometry preparation, 85 first order triangular elements, 20, 21
displacement interpolation function manual, 65–66
artificial restraints, 20–22 H
mapping to geometry, 76–78
Heat flow
definition, 17 mathematical model, 11–12
by conduction, 200–201, 207, 209
first order element, 18, 19 mesh adequacy, 75–76
by convection, 201–203, 208, 209
requirements, 20 modal analysis, 149, 150
by radiation, 203–204, 209
second order polynomial functions, semi-automatic, 66–67
18, 19 I shell model, conversion to, 78
dominance of, 10–11 Idealization, 213–214, 245 tuning fork, 150
element dimensionality, 23 Inter-element compatibility, 20 Mesh refinement
1D element, 26, 28 Internal compatibility, 20 by global
2D element, 25–27 displacement results, 36–37, 39
J
3D element, 24–26 iterations, 36, 38
Jacobian ratio, 216, 217
element order, 29–31 Von Mises stress, 36, 38–40
element shape, 28 L by local, 40–42
element type, 29–31 Linear buckling analysis Mirror symmetry
formulation, 12–13 analogies and terminology, 160 blue faces, 87, 88, 90
types, 240–241 BLF, 160–163 bracket02 model, 96, 98
Finite Volume Method, 10, 246 convergence, 163 definition, 88, 90
Frequency Response Analysis stress stiffness, 160 link01 model, 102–103
elbow pipe, 186, 194 Linear geometry analysis pressure tank model, 100, 101
industrial centrifuge, 188–189, 194–195 displacement plots, 109, 110 vibration modes, 148, 155, 156
results, 186, 187 membrane stress stiffening, 114, 116, 117 Modal analysis, 237
vibration modes, 186, 187 model deformation, 109, 110 airplane model, 142, 151–152
round shaft, couple of forces, 110, 123
G analogies and terminology, 160
shaft swelling, 109, 111
Gauss points, 34, 35 anti-symmetry, 148, 155, 156
torsion, 109, 112
Geometric nonlinearity ball joint, 152
Linear material model
cantilever beam, 106, 107, 122–123 convergence, 149
elastic-perfectly plastic material, 134
conservative load, 108 definition, 84
stress-strain curve, 129, 130
contact analysis, 120 displacement results, 140–141
Von Mises stress plot, 132, 133
cylindrical faces, 117, 118, 125–126 helicopter blade, 153–154
large displacement analysis, 119, 121 M hinge-supported link, 143–144, 152–153
mesh, 118, 119 Manual meshing, 65–66, 236 meshing, 149, 150
oversized ring, 119, 121 Mapping, 65–66, 76–78 mirror symmetry, 148, 155, 156
pressure, 122 Mass density, 84–85 pre-stress modal analysis, 146–147,
solution, 119, 122 Mesh compatibility, 69 154–155
Von Mises stress, 118, 120 compatible elements, 70, 241 RBMs, 141–143
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

Index 263

vs. static analysis, 139–140 idealization, 213, 214 nonlinear vibration analysis, 190, 191
stress results, 140 integrated with CAD, 219 results, 112, 113
vibration analysis, 146 management errors, 232–233 thin beam under pressure, 114, 116
vibration shape, 144–145 mathematical model, 227–228 thin flat plate, 112, 123–124
weak spots, 145, 151 meshing Structural analysis, 199–200
Modal Superposition Method, 146, 181–182 aspect ratio plots, 216, 217 T
Modeling error, 13–14, 242 Jacobian ratio, 216, 217 Thermal analysis
Motion Analysis, 2–4 mesh adequacy, 218 challenges, 206
tangent faces, 216, 217
N heat flow
personnel training, 221–223
Nodal stress, 34–36 by conduction, 200–201, 207, 209
positioning activities, 220, 221
Non-averaged stress, 36 by convection, 201–203, 208, 209
program selection, 223–225
Non-compatible elements, 241 by radiation, 203–204, 209
project documentation and backups, 231
Nonlinear buckling analysis heat sink and microchip assembly,
project execution, 227
Arc-Length Control method, 164, 165 204–205, 207–208
reports, 230
buckling mode shape, 167, 171 sharp reentrant edges, 205
return on investment, 226
chain of events, 165, 167 structural analysis and, 199–200
review of results, 228
compressive loads, 163–164 Three-dimensional (3D) geometry, 8–9
scope of analysis, 227
elastic-perfectly plastic material model, Time Response Analysis
stand-alone programs, 219
165, 167, 168, 170 displacement time history, 183–185
vs. linear buckling analysis, 167, 173 R impact force, 183
linear material model, 165, 166, 169 Radiation, 203–204, 209 load time history, 183, 184, 192–194
Load Control method, 164 Repetitive symmetry, 92–93 V
load-displacement curve, 167, 173 Restraints, 10, 54, 59, 86, 88, 95, 143 Validation, 14–15, 242
onset controlling, 174–175, 178–179 Rigid Body Motions (RBMs), 20, 95, 141–143 Verification, 14–15, 242
results, 167, 171, 172 Vibration analysis
“snap-through” effect, 177–178 S
Frequency Response Analysis
stress stiffness, 164 Semi-automatic meshing, 66–67
elbow pipe, 186, 194
structural collapse, 167, 170 Shell element, 24, 25, 34, 36, 72
industrial centrifuge, 188–189, 194–195
Nonlinear material analysis, 134–135 Single Degree of Freedom (SDOF), 146, 182
results, 186, 187
section clipping, 129, 132 “Snap-through” effect, 177–178
vibration modes, 186, 187
stress singularity Solid element, 24, 58, 59, 94, 235
harmonic impulse load, 192–193
elastic-perfectly material, 134 SOLIDWORKS Simulation, 250, 259, 260
Modal Superposition Method, 181–182
maximum von Mises stress, 132, 133 Solution error, 14
nonlinear analysis
sharp reentrant edge, 132, 133, 135, 136 Standards, 250
displacement response, 190, 192
stress-strain curve, 129, 130 Stiffness matrix, 12–13, 105–106, 245
plank stiffness, 190, 191, 195–196
Von Mises stress, 129, 131 Strain, 20, 26, 27, 129–130
time history of pressure, 190, 191
Nonlinear vibration analysis Stress
Time Response Analysis
displacement response, 190, 192 analysis, 84
displacement time history, 183–185
plank stiffness, 190, 191, 195–196 concentration, 237
impact force, 183
time history of pressure, 190, 191 constant, 18, 19
load time history, 183, 184, 192–194
Numerical error, 14, 243 in-plane, 24, 25, 75, 76
Von Mises stress
results, 20–22
O Stress singularity, 58 displacement interpolation function,
Omega Square Excitation, 188 20–22
elastic-perfectly plastic material,
h convergence
P 50–52, 134
adaptive h process, 42–44
Parasolid format, 259, 260 sharp reentrant edge, 50, 51, 53, 132, 133,
global mesh refinement, 36, 38–40
Product development process, 211 135, 136
local mesh refinement, 41–42
analysis of results, 229 2D plane stress problem, 48, 49
linear material model, 132, 133
building confidence, 225–226 Von Mises stress, 48, 49, 132, 133
nonlinear geometry analysis, 118, 120
CAE programs, 219–220 Stress stiffening
nonlinear material analysis, 129, 131
contracted-out project, 231–232 bending stiffness, 112, 113
p adaptive process, 45, 46
defeaturing, 212, 213 buckling analysis, 175, 176
singularity, 48, 49, 54, 56
Finite Element model, 228 floating hinge configuration, 114, 115, 124
geometry cleanup, 214–216 linear displacement analysis, 114, 116, 117 Y
hardware selection, 225 load-displacement curve, 113, 114 Yield strength, 129
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022
Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

About the Author

Dr. Paul M. Kurowski obtained his M.Sc. and Ph.D. in Applied Mechanics from Warsaw
University of Technology. He completed postdoctoral work at Kyoto University. Paul
Kurowski is a professor in the Faculty of Engineering at the University of Western Ontario.
His teachings include undergraduate and graduate courses in Product Design and

Courtesy of Paul M. Kurowski.


Development, Finite Element Methods, Computer Aided Engineering, Vibration Analysis,
Reverse Engineering and other courses in the field of solid mechanics and product design.
Paul is also the President of Design Generator Inc., a consulting firm with expertise in
Product Development and training in Computer-Aided Engineering methods. He has
published many technical papers and created and taught professional development seminars
in the field of Finite Element Analysis for SAE International, ASME, Professional Engineers
Ontario, Parametric Technology Corporation, Rand Worldwide, ADMI Canada,
SOLIDWORKS Corporation, and others. His professional interests revolve around finding
the best ways of using Computer Aided Engineering methods for faster and more effective
product development processes where numerical models replace physical prototypes. Paul
is a member of the Association of Professional Engineers Ontario and the SAE International.
He may be contacted at www.designgenerator.com.

© 2023 SAE International 265


Downloaded from SAE International by SAE International [Sales Team], Tuesday, December 20, 2022

You might also like